Audio, Visual & Navigation System PDF

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SECTION AV B
E
CONTENTS
AUDIO SYSTEM Reference Values ....................................................26 F
Wiring Diagram — BASE AUDIO — ........................28
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 11
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 34 G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........11
Work Flow ............................................................... 11 AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .......................... 34
Symptom Table .......................................................34
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS .............................. 13 H
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 35
AUDIO SYSTEM .................................................13 Description ...............................................................35
System Diagram ...................................................... 13
PRECAUTION .............................................. 36 I
System Description ................................................. 13
Component Parts Location ...................................... 14
Component Description ........................................... 14
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 36
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System J
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) ................15 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 15 SIONER" .................................................................36
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ............................36
K
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 19 Precaution for Harness Repair ................................36
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ......19 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 37

L
AUDIO UNIT .............................................................. 19 AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 37
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 19 Exploded View .........................................................37
Removal and Installation .........................................37
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT .........20 M
Description .............................................................. 20 AUDIO DISPLAY ............................................... 38
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 20 Exploded View .........................................................38
Component Inspection ............................................ 21 Removal and Installation .........................................38 AV
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT .........22 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 39
Description .............................................................. 22 Exploded View .........................................................39
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 22 Removal and Installation .........................................39 O
Component Inspection ............................................ 23
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 40
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT....24 Exploded View .........................................................40 P
Description .............................................................. 24 Removal and Installation .........................................40
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 24
Component Inspection ............................................ 25 FRONT SQUAWKER ........................................ 41
Exploded View .........................................................41
ECU DIAGNOSIS ......................................... 26 Removal and Installation .........................................41
AUDIO UNIT .......................................................26 STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 42
AV-1
Exploded View ........................................................ 42 Diagnosis Description ............................................. 60
Removal and Installation ........................................ 42 CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) ........................ 68
ANTENNA AMP. ................................................ 43 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 72

Exploded View ........................................................ 43
Removal and Installation ........................................ 43 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 72
Description .............................................................. 72
ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) ........................... 44 DTC Logic ............................................................... 72
Harness Layout ...................................................... 44 Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 72
BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 73
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 45 Description .............................................................. 73
DTC Logic ............................................................... 73
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ......... 45 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 73
Work Flow ............................................................... 45
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 74
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 47 Description .............................................................. 74
DTC Logic ............................................................... 74
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT-
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................................. 47 U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 75
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING Description .............................................................. 75
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description ... 47 DTC Logic ............................................................... 75
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re- U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT .............................. 76
pair Requirement .................................................... 47 Description .............................................................. 76
DTC Logic ............................................................... 76
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 47 U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ....................................... 77
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Description .............................................................. 77
CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................ 47 DTC Logic ............................................................... 77
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ..... 47
U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .................... 79
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION Description .............................................................. 79
ADJUSTMENT .......................................................... 47 DTC Logic ............................................................... 79
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79
TION ADJUSTMENT : Description ......................... 47
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI- U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................... 81
TION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Require- Description .............................................................. 81
ment ........................................................................ 47
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 82
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................. 48 AV CONTROL UNIT .................................................. 82
MULTI AV SYSTEM ........................................... 48 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 82
System Diagram ..................................................... 48 DISPLAY UNIT .......................................................... 82
System Description ................................................. 48 DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 82
Component Parts Location ..................................... 50
Component Description .......................................... 51 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ...................................... 83
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
AUDIO SYSTEM ................................................ 53 dure ......................................................................... 83
System Diagram ..................................................... 53
System Description ................................................. 53 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ....................................... 84
Component Parts Location ..................................... 54 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
Component Description .......................................... 55 ... 84
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ..................... 56 RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON-
System Diagram ..................................................... 56 TROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) ....................... 86
System Description ................................................. 56 Description .............................................................. 86
Component Parts Location ..................................... 58 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 86
Component Description .......................................... 59
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) ... 60 CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) ............... 87
AV-2
Description .............................................................. 87 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT . 104
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 87 Description ............................................................. 104 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON- Component Inspection ........................................... 105
TROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) ........................88
B
Description .............................................................. 88 ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 106
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 106
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT Reference Value .................................................... 106 C
(AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) ........89 Wiring Diagram — BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY
Description .............................................................. 89 SYSTEM — ........................................................... 112
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 89 DTC Index ............................................................. 126 D
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..................90 DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 128
Description .............................................................. 90 Reference Value .................................................... 128
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 90 Wiring Diagram — BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY E
SYSTEM — ........................................................... 131
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG-
NAL CIRCUIT .....................................................91 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ............................. 146
F
Description .............................................................. 91 Reference Values .................................................. 146
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91 Wiring Diagram — BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY
SYSTEM — ........................................................... 149
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL G
CIRCUIT .............................................................92 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 164
Description .............................................................. 92
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 92 MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................. 164
H
Symptom Table ..................................................... 164
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .........................93
Description .............................................................. 93 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 167
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 93 Description ............................................................. 167 I
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT .........................94 PRECAUTION ............................................ 169

Description .............................................................. 94 J
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 169
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY .........95 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Description .............................................................. 95 SIONER" ............................................................... 169 K
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 95 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 169
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 169
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................96 L
Description .............................................................. 96 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 170
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 170
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...........97 Exploded View ....................................................... 170 M
Description .............................................................. 97 Removal and Installation ....................................... 170
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 171
Exploded View ....................................................... 171 AV
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT ....................................................................98 Removal and Installation ....................................... 171
Description .............................................................. 98
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 172 O
Exploded View ....................................................... 172
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ....... 100 Removal and Installation ....................................... 172
Description ............................................................ 100 P
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 173
Exploded View ....................................................... 173
Component Inspection .......................................... 101
Removal and Installation ....................................... 173
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ....... 102
FRONT SQUAWKER ...................................... 174
Description ............................................................ 102
Exploded View ....................................................... 174
Component Inspection .......................................... 103
AV-3
ANTENNA AMP. .............................................. 175 PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
Exploded View .......................................................175 TION ADJUSTMENT : Description ....................... 187
Removal and Installation .......................................175 PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
TION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Require-
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 176 ment ...................................................................... 187
Exploded View .......................................................176
Removal and Installation .......................................176 FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ........................... 188
PRESET SWITCH ............................................ 177 MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 188
Exploded View .......................................................177 System Diagram ................................................... 188
Removal and Installation .......................................177 System Description ............................................... 188
Component Parts Location ................................... 190
REAR CONTROL SWITCH ............................. 178 Component Description ........................................ 191
Exploded View .......................................................178
Removal and Installation .......................................178 AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 193
System Diagram ................................................... 193
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS ............................. 179 System Description ............................................... 193
Exploded View .......................................................179 Component Parts Location ................................... 194
Removal and Installation .......................................179 Component Description ........................................ 195
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ............................. 180 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .................... 196
Exploded View .......................................................180 System Diagram ................................................... 196
Removal and Installation .......................................180 System Description ............................................... 196
Component Parts Location ................................... 198
REAR VIEW CAMERA .................................... 181
Component Description ........................................ 199
Exploded View .......................................................181
Removal and Installation .......................................181 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) .. 200
Adjustment .............................................................181 Diagnosis Description ........................................... 200
CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) ...................... 211
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ......................... 183
Exploded View .......................................................183 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ...................... 216
Removal and Installation .......................................183
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 216
ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) ......................... 184 Description ............................................................ 216
Harness Layout .....................................................184 DTC Logic ............................................................. 216
BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 216
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 185 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 217
Description ............................................................ 217
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 185 DTC Logic ............................................................. 217
Work Flow ..............................................................185 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 217
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................. 187 U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 218
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT- Description ............................................................ 218
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................................187 DTC Logic ............................................................. 218
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 219
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description ..187
Description ............................................................ 219
DTC Logic ............................................................. 219
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re-
pair Requirement ...................................................187 U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 220
Description ............................................................ 220
DTC Logic ............................................................. 220
CONTROL UNIT .......................................................187
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING U1231 BOSE AMP. .......................................... 221
CONTROL UNIT : Description ...............................187 Description ............................................................ 221
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING DTC Logic ............................................................. 221
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ....187
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ...................................... 222
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION Description ............................................................ 222
ADJUSTMENT .........................................................187 DTC Logic ............................................................. 222
AV-4
U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .................. 224 Description ............................................................. 235
Description ............................................................ 224 A
DTC Logic ............................................................. 224 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 236
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 224 AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 236
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 236 B
U1260, U1261, U1262, U1263 CENTER
SPEAKER ......................................................... 226 DISPLAY UNIT ......................................................... 236
Description ............................................................ 226 DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 236
DTC Logic ............................................................. 226 C
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 226 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ..................................... 237
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
U1264, U1265, U1266, U1267 FRONT RIGHT dure ....................................................................... 237 D
DOOR SPEAKER ............................................. 227
Description ............................................................ 227 BOSE AMP. ............................................................. 238
DTC Logic ............................................................. 227 BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 238
E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 227 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ...................................... 239
U1268, U1269, U126A, U126B REAR RIGHT CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
.. 239
DOOR SPEAKER ............................................. 228 F
Description ............................................................ 228 DVD PLAYER .......................................................... 239
DTC Logic ............................................................. 228 DVD PLAYER : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 239
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 228 G
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON-
U126C, U126D, U126E, U126F REAR RIGHT TROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) .................... 241
SQUAWKER/ RIGHT WOOFER ...................... 229 Description ............................................................. 241
Description ............................................................ 229 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 241 H
DTC Logic ............................................................. 229
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 229 RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV
CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) ............ 242 I
U1274, U1275, U1276, U1277 REAR LEFT Description ............................................................. 242
SQUAWKER/LEFT WOOFER ......................... 230 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 242
Description ............................................................ 230
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON- J
DTC Logic ............................................................. 230
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 230 TROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) .................... 243
Description ............................................................. 243
U1278, U1279, U127A, U127B REAR LEFT Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 243 K
DOOR SPEAKER ............................................. 231
Description ............................................................ 231 RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC Logic ............................................................. 231 (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) ..... 244 L
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 231 Description ............................................................. 244
U127C, U127D, U127E, U127F FRONT LEFT
DOOR SPEAKER ............................................. 232 RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 245 M
Description ............................................................ 232 Description ............................................................. 245
DTC Logic ............................................................. 232 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 245
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 232 AV
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG-
U1294, U1295, U1296, U1297 FRONT RIGHT NAL CIRCUIT .................................................. 246
SQUAWKER ..................................................... 233 Description ............................................................. 246
Description ............................................................ 233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 246 O
DTC Logic ............................................................. 233
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 233 VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL
CIRCUIT .......................................................... 247 P
U1298, U1299, U129A, U129B FRONT LEFT Description ............................................................. 247
SQUAWKER ..................................................... 234 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 247
Description ............................................................ 234
DTC Logic ............................................................. 234 AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................... 248
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 234 Description ............................................................. 248
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................. 235
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..................... 249
AV-5
Description .............................................................249 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 372
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................249
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................... 372
REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY ...... 250 Symptom Table ..................................................... 372
Description .............................................................250
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................250 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 375
Description ............................................................ 375
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 251
Description .............................................................251 PRECAUTION ........................................... 377
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 377
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......... 252 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Description .............................................................252 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................252 SIONER" ............................................................... 377
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 377
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIR- Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 377
CUIT ................................................................. 253
Description .............................................................253 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR .............................. 378
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 378
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ...... 255 Exploded View ...................................................... 378
Description .............................................................255 Removal and Installation ....................................... 378
Component Inspection ...........................................256 DISPLAY UNIT ................................................. 379
Exploded View ...................................................... 379
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ...... 257 Removal and Installation ....................................... 379
Description .............................................................257
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................257 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 380
Component Inspection ...........................................258 Exploded View ...................................................... 380
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT . 259
Description .............................................................259 REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 381
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................259 Exploded View ...................................................... 381
Component Inspection ...........................................260 Removal and Installation ....................................... 381
ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 261 FRONT SQUAWKER ....................................... 382

Exploded View ...................................................... 382
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 261 Removal and Installation ....................................... 382
Reference Value ....................................................261
Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAV- REAR SQUAWKER .......................................... 383
IGATION SYSTEM — ...........................................267 Exploded View ...................................................... 383
DTC Index .............................................................284 Removal and Installation ....................................... 383
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 287 CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 384

Reference Value ....................................................287 Exploded View ...................................................... 384
Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAV- Removal and Installation ....................................... 384
IGATION SYSTEM — ...........................................290 WOOFER .......................................................... 385
BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 308 Exploded View ...................................................... 385
Reference Value ....................................................308 Removal and Installation ....................................... 385
Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAV- BOSE AMP. ...................................................... 386
IGATION SYSTEM — ...........................................312
Exploded View ...................................................... 386
DVD PLAYER .................................................. 330 Removal and Installation ....................................... 386
Reference Values ..................................................330 ANTENNA AMP. ............................................... 387
Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAV-
Exploded View ...................................................... 387
IGATION SYSTEM — ...........................................333
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ............................. 351 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 388
Reference Values ..................................................351 Exploded View ...................................................... 388
Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAV- Removal and Installation ....................................... 388
IGATION SYSTEM — ...........................................354
AV-6
PRESET SWITCH ............................................ 389 FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ............................ 401
Exploded View ...................................................... 389 A
Removal and Installation ....................................... 389 MULTI AV SYSTEM ........................................ 401
System Diagram .................................................... 401
REAR CONTROL SWITCH .............................. 390 System Description ................................................ 401
B
Exploded View ...................................................... 390 Component Parts Location .................................... 404
Removal and Installation ....................................... 390 Component Description ......................................... 405
DVD PLAYER ................................................... 391 AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................. 407 C
Exploded View ...................................................... 391 System Diagram .................................................... 407
Removal and Installation ....................................... 391 System Description ................................................ 407
Component Parts Location .................................... 408 D
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS .............................. 392 Component Description ......................................... 409
Exploded View ...................................................... 392
Removal and Installation ....................................... 392 NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................. 410
System Diagram .................................................... 410 E
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .............................. 393 System Description ................................................ 410
Exploded View ...................................................... 393 Component Parts Location .................................... 413
Removal and Installation ....................................... 393 Component Description ......................................... 414 F
REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 394 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ................... 415
Exploded View ...................................................... 394 System Diagram .................................................... 415
Removal and Installation ....................................... 394 System Description ................................................ 415 G
Adjustment ............................................................ 394 Component Parts Location .................................... 417
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .......................... 396 Component Description ......................................... 418
Exploded View ...................................................... 396 H
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 419
Removal and Installation ....................................... 396 Diagnosis Description ............................................ 419
ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) .......................... 397 CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) ...................... 434
I
Harness Layout ..................................................... 397 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 440
BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 440 J
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 398 Description ............................................................. 440
DTC Logic .............................................................. 440
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ....... 398 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 440
Work Flow ............................................................. 398 K
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 441
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 400 Description ............................................................. 441
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BAT- DTC Logic .............................................................. 441 L
TERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................................. 400 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 441
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 442
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Description .. 400 M
Description ............................................................. 442
DTC Logic .............................................................. 442
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Re-
pair Requirement ................................................... 400 U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 443 AV
Description ............................................................. 443
CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 400 DTC Logic .............................................................. 443
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 444 O
CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 400 Description ............................................................. 444
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING DTC Logic .............................................................. 444
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .. 400
P
U1231 BOSE AMP. ......................................... 445
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION
Description ............................................................. 445
ADJUSTMENT ......................................................... 400
DTC Logic .............................................................. 445
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
TION ADJUSTMENT : Description ....................... 400 U1243 DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 446
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSI- Description ............................................................. 446
TION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Require- DTC Logic .............................................................. 446
ment ...................................................................... 400 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 446
AV-7
U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .................. 448 Description ............................................................ 459
Description .............................................................448 DTC Logic ............................................................. 459
DTC Logic ..............................................................448 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 459
U12A1 NAVI CONTROL UNIT ......................... 460
U1260, U1261, U1262, U1263 CENTER Description ............................................................ 460
SPEAKER ........................................................ 450 DTC Logic ............................................................. 460
Description .............................................................450
DTC Logic ..............................................................450
U12A2 TEL ANTENNA ..................................... 461
Description ............................................................ 461
DTC Logic ............................................................. 461
U1264, U1265, U1266, U1267 FRONT RIGHT Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 461
DOOR SPEAKER ............................................ 451
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT .............................. 462
Description .............................................................451
Description ............................................................ 462
DTC Logic ..............................................................451
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................451 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 464
U1268, U1269, U126A, U126B REAR RIGHT AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 464
DOOR SPEAKER ............................................ 452 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 464
Description .............................................................452
DTC Logic ..............................................................452 NAVI CONTROL UNIT ............................................ 464
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................452 NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 464
U126C, U126D, U126E, U126F REAR RIGHT DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................ 465
SQUAWKER/ RIGHT WOOFER ...................... 453 DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 465
Description .............................................................453 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH .................................... 466
DTC Logic ..............................................................453 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................453 dure ....................................................................... 466
U1274, U1275, U1276, U1277 REAR LEFT BOSE AMP. ............................................................. 466
SQUAWKER/LEFT WOOFER ......................... 454 BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 466
Description .............................................................454
DTC Logic ..............................................................454 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ..................................... 467
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................454 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
. 467
U1278, U1279, U127A, U127B REAR LEFT
DOOR SPEAKER ............................................ 455 DVD PLAYER .......................................................... 468
DVD PLAYER : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 468
Description .............................................................455
DTC Logic ..............................................................455 RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................455 TROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) ...................... 469
U127C, U127D, U127E, U127F FRONT LEFT Description ............................................................ 469
DOOR SPEAKER ............................................ 456 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 469
Description .............................................................456 RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV
DTC Logic ..............................................................456 CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) .............. 470
Description ............................................................ 470
U1294, U1295, U1296, U1297 FRONT RIGHT Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 470
SQUAWKER .................................................... 457 RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CON-
Description .............................................................457 TROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) ...................... 471
DTC Logic ..............................................................457
Description ............................................................ 471
U1298, U1299, U129A, U129B FRONT LEFT RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
SQUAWKER .................................................... 458 (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT) ....... 472
Description .............................................................458
Description ............................................................ 472
DTC Logic ..............................................................458
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 473
U12A0 GPS ANTENNA ................................... 459 Description ............................................................ 473
AV-8
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 473 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT ..... 489
Description ............................................................. 489 A
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 489
NAL CIRCUIT ................................................... 474 Component Inspection ........................................... 490
Description ............................................................ 474
B
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 474 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT ..... 491
Description ............................................................. 491
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 491
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 475 Component Inspection ........................................... 492 C
Description ............................................................ 475
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 475 STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT . 493
Description ............................................................. 493 D
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI CON- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 493
TROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT) ............. 476 Component Inspection ........................................... 494
Description ............................................................ 476
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 476 ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 495 E
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 495
CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT) ..... 477 Reference Value .................................................... 495
F
Description ............................................................ 477 Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 477 TION SYSTEM — .................................................. 502
DTC Index ............................................................. 521
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI G
CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT) ..... 478 NAVI CONTROL UNIT .................................... 524
Description ............................................................ 478 Reference Value .................................................... 524
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 478 Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA- H
TION SYSTEM — .................................................. 527
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(NAVI CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 547
Reference Value .................................................... 547 I
UNIT) ................................................................ 479
Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
Description ............................................................ 479
TION SYSTEM — .................................................. 550
J
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....................... 480 BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 570
Reference Value .................................................... 570
Description ............................................................ 480
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 480 K
TION SYSTEM — .................................................. 574
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....................... 481
Description ............................................................ 481
DVD PLAYER .................................................. 594
Reference Values .................................................. 594 L
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 482 TION SYSTEM — .................................................. 597
Description ............................................................ 482
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ............................. 617 M
Reference Values .................................................. 617
REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY ....... 484 Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGA-
Description ............................................................ 484 TION SYSTEM — .................................................. 620 AV
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 640
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 485
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................. 640 O
Description ............................................................ 485
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 485 Symptom Table ..................................................... 640
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......... 486 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 645
P
Description ............................................................ 486 Description ............................................................. 645
PRECAUTION ............................................ 647
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIR-
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 647
CUIT .................................................................. 487 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Description ............................................................ 487 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 487 SIONER" ............................................................... 647
AV-9
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ..........................647 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 659
Precaution for Harness Repair ..............................647 Exploded View ...................................................... 659
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 648
PRESET SWITCH ............................................. 660
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 648 Exploded View ...................................................... 660
Exploded View .......................................................648 Removal and Installation ....................................... 660
REAR CONTROL SWITCH .............................. 661
NAVI CONTROL UNIT ..................................... 649 Exploded View ...................................................... 661
DVD PLAYER ................................................... 662
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 650 Exploded View ...................................................... 662
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS .............................. 663
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 651 Exploded View ...................................................... 663
MICROPHONE ................................................. 664
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 652 Exploded View ...................................................... 664
GPS ANTENNA ................................................ 665
FRONT SQUAWKER ....................................... 653 Harness Layout ..................................................... 665
Exploded View .......................................................653 Exploded View ...................................................... 666
Removal and Installation .......................................653 Removal and Installation ....................................... 666
REAR SQUAWKER ......................................... 654 TEL ANTENNA ................................................. 667
Exploded View .......................................................654 Harness Layout ..................................................... 667
Removal and Installation .......................................654 Exploded View ...................................................... 668
CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 655
Exploded View .......................................................655 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT .............................. 669
WOOFER ......................................................... 656
Exploded View .......................................................656 REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 670
BOSE AMP. ..................................................... 657
Adjustment ............................................................ 670
Exploded View .......................................................657
Removal and Installation .......................................657 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .......................... 672
Exploded View ...................................................... 672
ANTENNA AMP. .............................................. 658
Exploded View .......................................................658
Removal and Installation .......................................658 ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO) .......................... 673
Harness Layout ..................................................... 673
AV-10
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AUDIO SYSTEM]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000003765587
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
ALNIA0182GB M
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM AV
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM P
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify the relation between the symptom and the con-
dition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
AV-11
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AUDIO SYSTEM]
Is a malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 5.
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and check that the symptom is not detected.
Has the symptom been repaired?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 2.
AV-12
AUDIO SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [AUDIO SYSTEM]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
AUDIO SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000003765588
B
G
JSNIA1295GB
System Description INFOID:0000000003765589 H
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components. I
• Audio unit
• Antenna amp.
• Glass antenna
• Steering switch J
• Front door speakers
• Rear door speakers
• Front squawkers K
• Audio display unit
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is integrated into audio unit. L
• When AM/FM radio waves are received by rear window glass antenna, the radio waves are amplified by an
antenna amp. to input them to audio unit. Sound signals are output to each speaker for the audio unit. The
FM sub antenna is installed on the rear window glass and the audio unit is received. M
CD Mode
• The audio unit has CD function.
• The audio unit outputs sound signals to each speaker when CD is inserted into the audio unit. AV
AV-13
AUDIO SYSTEM
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000003765590
JPNIA1057ZZ
1. Front squawker RH 2. Front squawker LH 3. Front door speaker LH

4. Rear door speaker LH 5. Antenna amp. 6. Rear door speaker RH
7. Front door speaker RH 8. Steering switch 9. Audio unit
10. Audio display unit
A. Within rear pillar finisher RH
Component Description INFOID:0000000003765591
Part name Description

• Has radio function and CD playing function.
AUDIO UNIT
• Sound signals are output to each speaker.
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT Display images are controlled by AV communication from audio unit.
• Outputs sound signals from audio unit.
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound (mid and low range).
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound (high and mid range).
STEERING SWITCH Steering switch signals (operation signals) are output to audio unit.
• Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to audio
ANTENNA AMP. unit.
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from audio unit.
AV-14
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
A
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000003765592
Self-diagnosis mode can perform the following items. B

• Versions display
• Channel check diagnosis
• Key check diagnosis
• AV communication diagnosis C
VERSIONS DISPLAY FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON. D
2. Turn the audio unit off.
3. While pressing “1” button, turn volume control dial clockwise or
counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. E
JSNIA1334GB
H
4. Diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.
NOTE:
Diagnosis default screen = All icons and segments of the audio display unit are turned on.
I
5. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly displays the version display mode. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly
switches to each version display. Pressing and holding the AUDIO switch when displaying each software
version returns to the diagnosis default screen.
J
Version display item
Mode Description
Software V###### Audio unit software version is displayed.
K
Hardware V###### Audio unit hardware version is displayed.
Disp HW V###### Display unit hardware version is displayed.
Versions display
CD Mech V###### Audio unit CD mechanism version is displayed. L
EEPROM V###### Audio unit EEPROM version is displayed.
Disp SW V###### Display unit software version is displayed.
M
6. Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
CHANNEL CHECK DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON. AV
3. While pressing the “1” button, turn the volume control dial clock-
wise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. O
JSNIA1334GB
AV-15
4. The diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.
NOTE:
5. Turning the TUNE/FOLDER dial clockwise displays the channel check mode. Pressing and holding the
AUDIO switch during each channel check or waiting approximately 1 second after finishing all channel
checks returns to the diagnosis default screen.
Channel check item
Mode Description
Channel Check
Front Left
Channel Check
Rear Left
Channel check Connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Channel Check
Rear Right
Channel Check
Front Right
KEY CHECK DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
wise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
JSNIA1334GB
4. The diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.

NOTE:
5. Turning the TUNE/FOLDER dial counterclockwise displays the key check mode, and the pressed switch
name is shown. Pressing and holding the AUDIO switch during the key check returns to the diagnosis
default screen.
AV-16
Key check item (audio)
Mode Display item Switch name A
EJECT “EJECT” switch
LOAD “LOAD” switch
POWER “ON·OFF” switch
B
VOLUME up “VOL up” switch

VOLUME down “VOL down” switch C
1 Preset button “1” switch
3 Preset button “3” switch D
E
Key check
AM·FM “AM·FM” switch
DISC “DISC” switch F
AUX “AUX” switch
AUDIO “AUDIO” switch
G
TUNE/FOLDER up “TUNE/FOLDER up” switch
TUNE/FOLDER down “TUNE/FOLDER up” switch
DISP CLOCK “DISP CLOCK” switch H
AUTO.P “AUTO.P”” switch
SCAN/RPT “SCAN RPT” switch
I
SEEK/TRACK down “SEEK” switch
SEEK/TRACK up “TRACK” switch
Key check item (steering switch) J

Mode Display item Switch name
STR SOURCE “SOURCE” switch
STR VOL UP “VOL up” switch K
Key check STR VOL DOWN “VOL down” switch
STR UP “SEEK up” switch
L
STR DOWN “SEEK down” switch
AV COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION M

2. Turn the audio unit off. AV
wise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
O
JSNIA1335GB
4. Returns to diagnosis default screen and displays “AV DIAGNOSIS”.
AV-17
5. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly displays the AV communication diagnosis mode. Pressing the AUDIO
switch briefly again switches to each AV communication display.
AV communication diagnosis item
Display item
Description
AV communication item Current Past
The communication condition and error counter from the audio unit to
TRANSMIT OK / UN OK / 0 –39
the audio display unit are displayed.
DISP OK / UN OK / 0 –39 The communication condition and error counter from the audio display
DISP MPDT OK / UN OK / 0 –39 unit to the audio unit.
NO HISTORY BTHF — — Not used.

AV TROUBLE DEL — — The error record can be deleted.
6. Pressing the TRACK switch displays the confirmation screen of “delete error record”. Press the SEEK
switch if returning from RECORD DEL YES? to RECORD DEL NO?
The item is automatically determined approximately 6 seconds after it is displayed. Then the display
returns to AV TROUBLE DEL display item.
Display item Description

RECORD DEL NO? Does not delete error record.
RECORD DEL YES? Deletes error record.
AV-18
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [AUDIO SYSTEM]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS A
AUDIO UNIT
B
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003765593
1.CHECK FUSE C
Check for blown fuses.
Power source Fuse No. D

Battery 31
Ignition switch ACC or ON 19
E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. F
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between audio unit harness connectors and ground.
G
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Value (Approx.)
Battery power supply 19 OFF
M46 Battery voltage H
ACC power supply 7 ACC
YES >> INSPECTION END I
NO >> Check harness between audio unit and fuse.
AV
AV-19
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000003765594
Transmits the steering switch signal to audio unit.

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003765595
1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect audio unit connector and spiral cable connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
Audio unit Spiral cable

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M46 6 M33 24 Existed
3. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector and ground.
Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M46 6 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable.
3.CHECK AUDIO UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect audio unit connector and spiral cable connector.
3. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector terminals.
(+) (−)
Audio unit Voltage
M46 6 M46 15 Approx. 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace audio unit.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-21, "Component Inspection".
NO >> Replace steering switch.
AV-20
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000003765596
A
Measure the resistance between the steering switch connector ter-
minals.
B
D
JSNIA1145GB
Standard
E
Steering switch
Resistance
Con- Termi- Con- Termi- Condition
Ω
nector nals nector nal
F
SEEK DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
SEEK UP switch ON 119 – 123
M303 M303 17 G
SOURCE switch ON 0
VOL UP switch ON 119 – 123
15
VOL DOWN switch ON 0 H
AV
AV-21
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT


Continuity
Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M46 16 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AUDIO UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect audio unit connector and spiral cable connector.
3. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector terminals.
(+) (−)
Audio unit Voltage
M46 16 M46 15 Approx. 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.
AV-22
A
minals.
B
D
JSNIA1145GB
Standard
E
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
F
SEEK DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
M303 M303 17 G
SOURCE switch ON 0
15
AV
AV-23
STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT


Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Connect audio unit connector.
Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M46 15 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
AV-24
A
minals.
B
D
JSNIA1145GB
Standard
E
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
F
SEEK DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
M303 M303 17 G
SOURCE switch ON 0
15
AV
AV-25
AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [AUDIO SYSTEM]
ECU DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO UNIT
Reference Values INFOID:0000000003765603
TERMINAL LAYOUT
PHYSICAL VALUES
JSNIA1428ZZ
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
2 3
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output.
(W) (B)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
4 5
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Sound output.
(O/B) (W/R)
ON
SKIB3609E
Keep pressing SOURCE

0V
switch.
Ignition
6 15 Keep pressing switch. 1.0 V
Steering switch signal A Input switch
(W/G) (L/B)
ON
Keep pressing switch. 2.0 V
Except for above. 5.0 V
Ignition
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(V/W)
ACC
Ignition
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output.
(B/W) (BR)
ON
SKIB3609E
AV-26
AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
13 14 C
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Sound output.
(L) (B/W)
ON
SKIB3609E D
Ignition
15 Steering switch signal
Ground — switch — 0V
(L/B) ground
ON E
Keep pressing VOL DOWN
0V
Ignition switch.
16 15 Steering switch signal B Input switch
Keep pressing VOL UP F
(GR/L) (L/B) ON 1.0 V
switch.
Ignition G
19
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(Y)
OFF
21
Ground
AV communication signal Input/
— — —
H
(R) (L) Output
22 AV communication signal Input/
Ground — — —
(L) (H) Output I
33 — FM sub Input — — —
34 — AM-FM main Input — — —
Ignition J
35 Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output switch — 12.0 V
ACC
K
AV
AV-27
AUDIO UNIT
Wiring Diagram — BASE AUDIO — INFOID:0000000003765604
JCNWM0876GB
AV-28
AUDIO UNIT
AV
JCNWM0877GB
AV-29
AUDIO UNIT
JCNWM0878GB
AV-30
AUDIO UNIT
AV
JCNWM0879GB
AV-31
AUDIO UNIT
JCNWM0880GB
AV-32
AUDIO UNIT
AV
JCNWM0881GB
AV-33
AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [AUDIO SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000003765605
RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take

Audio unit malfunction.
No sound from all speakers.
Refer to AV-37, "Exploded View".
Audio sound is not heard.
Sound signal malfunction between audio unit and speaker
There is no sound from one of speakers.
on the side where there is no sound.
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal. • Antenna feeder
• Glass antenna
• Audio display power supply and ground circuits.
Audio display does not work. — • AV communication circuits between audio unit and au-
dio display.
RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH
Symptoms Inspection location / Probable malfunction location

Steering switch signal GND circuit
None of the steering switch operations work.
Refer to AV-24, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch
Only specified switch (1) cannot be operated.
Refer to AV-42, "Exploded View".
“SOURCE”, “SEEK UP”, “SEEK DOWN” switches of steering Steering switch signal A circuit
switch are not operational. Refer to AV-20, "Diagnosis Procedure".
”VOL UP“, “VOL DOWN” switches of steering switch are not Steering switch signal B circuit
operational. Refer to AV-22, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AV-34
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [AUDIO SYSTEM]
A
NOTE: B
• Audio operation information, refer to Owner's Manual.
• The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
C
NOISE
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
D
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves that reflect off mountains or buildings. E
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera-
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
F
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be easily found by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
G
Types of Noise and Possible Causes
Occurrence condition Possible cause

H
A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
I
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op-
Noise only occurs when various • Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
eration of various switches.
electrical components are oper-
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground J
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line K
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit L
AV
AV-35
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [AUDIO SYSTEM]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000003960541
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIRBAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000003765608
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage at 7.0 V or less.
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before checking the cir-
cuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000003765609
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
AV-36
AUDIO UNIT
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [AUDIO SYSTEM]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
AUDIO UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000003765611
B
REMOVAL
Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". C
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1027ZZ I
1. Audio unit 2. Bracket LH 3. A/C auto amp.

4. Bracket RH
J
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003765612
REMOVAL K
1. Remove instrument finisher C. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". L
3. Remove audio unit with an A/C auto amp. as a single unit from the body.
4. Remove bracket screws, and then remove audio unit.
INSTALLATION M
Install in the reverse order of removal.
AV
AV-37
AUDIO DISPLAY
AUDIO DISPLAY
JPNIA1028ZZ
1. Audio display unit 2. Front cover 3. A/C display

4. Bracket
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove audio display unit and A/C display with bracket as a
single unit (1).
3. Remove bracket screws, and then remove audio display unit.
JPNIA1029ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV-38
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA1030ZZ
E
1. Front door speaker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-30, "DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation" (driver side) or G
INT-33, "PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation" (passenger side).
2. Remove front door speaker screws, then disconnect front door speaker connector and remove front door
speaker.
H
INSTALLATION
I
AV
AV-39
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
JPNIA1031ZZ
1. Rear door speaker
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-36, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear door speaker screws, then disconnect rear door speaker connector and remove rear door
speaker.
INSTALLATION
AV-40
FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
A
D
JPNIA1038ZZ
E
1. Front squawker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove speaker grille. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". G
2. Remove front squawker screws, lift up the front squawker and disconnect front squawker connector. Then
remove the front squawker.
INSTALLATION H
AV
AV-41
STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View".

REMOVAL
Refer to ST-12, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
AV-42
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
A
D
JPNIA1032ZZ
E
1. AM-FM main connector
2. Antenna amp.
F
REMOVAL
G
1. Remove rear side pillar finisher. Refer to INT-39, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect antenna feeder connector and clip.
3. Remove antenna amp. mounting nut, disconnect the antenna amp. connector. H
4. Remove antenna amp.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. I
AV
AV-43
ANTENNA FEEDER (RADIO)
Harness Layout INFOID:0000000003765625
JSNIA1429GB
AV-44
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSNIA0732GB M
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-126, "DTC Index". AV
• Reference 3··· Refer to AV-164, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> INSPECTION END
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT-III
AV-45
1. Connect CONSULT-III and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Func-
tion (MULTI AV)".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC is displayed in the self-diagnosis results.
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-126, "DTC Index".
>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-164, "Symptom
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT-III.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
AV-46
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : De-
B
scription INFOID:0000000003882693
WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR

C
Always correct the center position of the predicted course line after disconnecting the battery negative termi-
nal.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Spe- D
cial Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000003882694
1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF PREDICTED COURSE LINE E

Refer to the following for details.
F
>> Refer to AV-47, "PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special
Repair Requirement".
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
G
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000003882695
When camera control unit is replaced, the center position of predicted course line shall be corrected. H
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-

quirement INFOID:0000000003882696 I
1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF PREDICTED COURSE LINE

Refer to the following for details. J
Repair Requirement". K
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description L
INFOID:0000000003882697
Adjust the center position of the possible route line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted.
M
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair
Requirement INFOID:0000000003882698
AV
1.STEERING OPERATION
Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost ends.
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.DRIVING P
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.
>> END
AV-47
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
JSNIA1431GB
NOTE:
• The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually.
• A radio antenna base integrated with radio antenna amp. is adopted.
• Woofer illustrated in the above figure, integrates two woofers and a woofer amp.
System Description INFOID:0000000003882700
Multi AV system means that the following systems are integrated.
System name System explanation

AUDIO SYSTEM AV-53, "System Diagram"
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM AV-56, "System Description"
• Status of audio, climate control system, fuel economy, mainte-
nance and navigation is displayed.
• AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while re-
VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM ceiving data signal through CAN communication from ECM and
combination meter.
• AV control unit is connected to BCM via CAN communication
transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function.
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM Refer to “AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM” shown below.
• AV control unit controls by transmitting/receiving data one by one with each unit (slave unit) that configures
them completely as a master unit by connecting between units that configure MULTI AV system with two AV
communication lines (H, L).
• Two AV communication lines (H, L) adopt a twisted pair line that is resistant to noise.
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, combination
meter. It computes and displays fuel economy information value with the obtained information. Transmitting/
receiving of data signal is performed by BCM. Also, it transmits the required signal of vehicle setting and
receives the response signal.
AV-48
MULTI AV SYSTEM
• AV control unit is connected with display unit and serial communication, and it transmits the required signal
of display and display control and receives the response signal from display unit. A
NOTE:
AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis.
• CONSULT-III self diagnosis: Refer to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
B
• On board self diagnosis: Refer to AV-60, "Diagnosis Description".
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM
• Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks. C
• Operation can be performed with multifunction switch, steering switch and rear control switch. Multifunction
switch and rear control switch transmits operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication.
D
H
JSNIA1432GB
AV
AV-49
MULTI AV SYSTEM
JSNIA1433ZZ

4. Rear door speaker LH 5. Rear control switch 6. Rear view camera
7. Camera control unit 8. Antenna amp. 9. Rear door speaker RH
10. Front door speaker RH 11. Steering angle sensor 12. Steering switch
13. AV control unit 14. Auxiliary input jacks 15. Preset switch
16. Multifunction switch 17. Display unit
A. Trunk room side RH B. Within rear pillar finisher RH C. Spiral cable part
D. In center console
AV-50
MULTI AV SYSTEM

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control B
unit by communication. It operates each system according to communication
signals from the AV control unit.
• AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function.
• It is connected to ECM and combination meter via CAN communication to ob- C
tain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
AV CONTROL UNIT • It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
vehicle settings function.
• AUX image signal is input from auxiliary jacks.
D
• Camera image signal is input from camera control unit.
• Composite image (AUX and camera images) signal is output to display unit.
• AUX sound signal is input from the auxiliary jacks. E
• Power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) is transmitted to front display unit.
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
• It receives the power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) from the AV control unit
and operates. F
• RGB image signal is input from AV control unit (RGB, RGB area and RGB syn-
DISPLAY UNIT
chronizing).
• Composite image (AUX and camera images) signal is input from AV control
G
unit.
• Synchronize signal (HP, VP) is output to AV control unit.
• Outputs sound signal from front speaker.
FRONT SPEAKER H
• Outputs sound signal from rear speaker.
REAR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from front squawker.
I
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where camera, audio
and auxiliary input operations are integrated. J
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
• The multifunction switch is connected to the preset switch by wiring harness,
and it transmits the operation signal to the preset switch.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air K
conditioner operations are integrated.
PRESET SWITCH • The preset switch is connected via AV communication, and it transmits the op-
eration signals of the preset switch and multifunction switch.
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by wiring harness. L
• Camera image signal is input from rear view camera. Camera image signal
output to AV control unit.
• Power supply is transmitted to rear view camera. M
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• AV control unit recognizes the presence of camera system with camera con-
nection recognition signal.
• Camera control unit is connected via AV communication.
• The image of vehicle rear view is transmitted to camera control unit.
AV
REAR VIEW CAMERA
• It receives the power supply from the camera control unit and operates.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Sensor signal (steering angle) is transmitted to camera control unit.
O
• The operations of audio, etc. can be performed.
STEERING SWITCH
• Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to AV control unit.
• The image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the AV control unit to the
display unit. P
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
• The sound signal of the auxiliary input is output via the AV control unit to the
each speaker.
AV-51
MULTI AV SYSTEM
• Operations for audio, etc. are possible.
REAR CONTROL SWITCH • The rear control switch is connected via AV communication, and it transmits
the operation signals of the rear control switch.
• Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV con-
ANTENNA AMP. trol unit.
• Power (antenna amp ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
AV-52
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
A
JSNIA1434GB
NOTE: G
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually.
The audio system is equipped with following function. Each function can be operated with the multifunction
switch, preset switch, rear control switch or steering switch. It indicates the operation status of AUDIO to the
I
display unit.
Function
J
AM/FM radio
CD
K
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Operating Signal
Operation of the audio system can be performed via the multifunction switch, preset switch, rear control switch L
or steering switch.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit via AV communication when it is operated by multifunction
switch, preset switch or rear control switch. The CD ejection operating signal is performed by hard-wire.
• Operating signal is transmitted to AV control unit with steering switch signal when it is operated by steering M
switch.
Screen Display
AV
• The display switching of the screen is performed by the communication signal between the display unit and
the AV control unit.
• The image signal to display operating condition is performed by RGB image signal, RGB area signal and
RGB image synchronizing signal. O
AM/FM Radio Mode
• AM/FM radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
• AM/FM radio wave is received by glass antenna, next it is amplified by antenna amp., and finally it is input to P
AV control unit. The FM sub antenna is installed on the rear window glass and the AV control unit is
received.
• Sound signal is input to AV control unit, and AV control unit outputs to each speaker.
CD Mode
• CD function is built into AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs sound signal to each speaker when CD is inserted to AV control unit.
AV-53
AUDIO SYSTEM
JSNIA1433ZZ

AV-54
AUDIO SYSTEM

• The AM/FM receiving function and the CD playing function are equipped. B
AV CONTROL UNIT
• Sound signal is transmitted to each speaker.
DISPLAY UNIT
• RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit. C
• Outputs sound signal from front speaker.
FRONT SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from rear speaker. D
REAR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from front squawker.
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound (high and mid range). E
• Each audio operation can be operated.
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH • The multifunction switch is connected to the preset switch by wiring harness,
F
• The preset switch is connected via AV communication, and it transmits the op-
PRESET SWITCH
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hard-wire. G
STEERING SWITCH
• Each audio operation can be operated. H
• Radio signal received by glass antenna is amplified and transmitted to AV con- I
• Power (antenna amp. ON signal) is supplied from AV control unit.
AV
AV-55
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
JSNIA1379GB
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE

• Power is supplied to rear view camera from camera control unit and the rear view camera outputs the cam-
era image to camera control unit when selector lever is set to reverse position and the reverse signal on
camera control unit is input.
• Camera control unit superimposes the guiding line and predicted course line to the image from rear view
camera and outputs to display unit. In this case, the reverse signal is also input to AV control unit. Therefore,
AV control unit recognizes the selector lever as in the reverse position. And then AV control unit switches the
image displayed by the communication signal between AV control unit and display unit with the camera
image.
• AV control unit outputs camera image signal that is inputted from camera control unit to display unit.
• Camera control unit controls the direction and distance of predicted course line according to the sensor sig-
nal from steering angle sensor.
• AV control unit determines whether rear view camera is equipped or not, based on the presence of camera
connection recognition signal. It switches to rear view monitor image at the time of reverse signal input when
rear view camera is equipped.
Rear view monitor guiding line
JSNIA1325GB
AV-56
PREDICTED COURSE LINE OPERATION PRINCIPLE
A
Detection Of Steering Rotation Direction
Camera control unit detects the rotation direction of steering according to the phase difference of two pairs of
pulse signals (sensor signal 1 and sensor signal 2) input from steering angle sensor.
B
Detection Of Steering Neutral Position
The sensor signal 3 input from steering angle sensor is generated at 1 pulse per 1 rotation of the steering
wheel. Camera control unit detects the steering neutral position from this pulse.
C
JSNIA0708GB
H
Correction Of Steering Neutral Position

Camera control unit corrects the steering neutral position during driving according to the vehicle speed signal
and sensor signal. I
AV
AV-57
JSNIA1433ZZ

AV-58

• Image on display is transmitted to rear view monitor image by serial communi- B
cation between AV control unit and display unit.
AV CONTROL UNIT
C
• Camera image signal is input from AV control unit.
DISPLAY UNIT • Rear view monitor image is changed by serial communication from AV control
unit.
• Camera image signal is input from rear view camera. Camera image signal is
D
• Power supply is transmitted to rear view camera.
• Superimposes the guiding line and predicted course line to the camera image E
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
that outputs to AV control unit.
• Inputs the sensor signal from steering angle sensor, and then controls the pre-
dicted course line.
• Camera control unit is connected via AV communication. F
REAR VIEW CAMERA
• It receives power supply from camera control unit and operates.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

Steering signal necessary for predicted course line control is transmitted to cam- G
era control unit.
AV
AV-59
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 4-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE:
The hazard switch and disk eject switch cannot be checked.
JSNIA1284GB
Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.
MULTI AV SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT-III diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., the screen does not display
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of
the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display.
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The check,
modify or adjust actions generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically).
On Board Diagnosis Item
Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis
• Diagnoses the connections across system components.
AV-60
Mode Description
A
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color
Display Diagnosis bar display, light and shade check by grey scale display and touch panel
calibration response check.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake, B
Vehicle Signals
lights, ignition switch, and reverse.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
C
Climate Control* Not used.
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurred in the past are
Error History displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place
Confirmation/ that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed. D
Adjustment
It can perform the confirmation of a signal connection to the camera con-
trol unit, the calibration of each camera, Correct Draw Line of Camera
Camera Cont.
Image, and Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View. E
Refer to AV-60, "Diagnosis Description".
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be F
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history.
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory. G
NOTE:
*:On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT-III is supported.
H
STARTING PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system OFF. I
3. While pressing the “SETTING” button, turn the volume control
dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) J
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing “BACK” button.
K
L
JSNIA1285GB
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the M

items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
selected.
AV
JSNIA0138GB P
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-diagnosis mode starts.
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trou-
ble diagnosis.
AV-61
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-
pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results.
Con-
Diagnosis results Unit nection
line
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow
Unit malfunction Note Red Green JSNIA1435GB
NOTE:
• Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated.
The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-170, "Removal and Installation".
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined accord-
ing to the following order of priority: red > yellow > gray.
- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a
component in the diagnosis result screen.
JSNIA0141GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function can-
not be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and
multifunction switch.
• Check the applicable display in the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
Self-diagnosis Result Chart
Possible malfunction location / Action

Area with yellow connection lines Description
to take
Check AV control unit power supply

Malfunction is detected in AV control and ground circuits. When detecting
unit power supply and ground circuits no malfunction in those components,
replace AV control unit.
JSNIA1436GB
NOTE:
When a control unit malfunction is detected (red in
unit display), connection malfunctions with other
connection unit may be displayed.
“Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit
malfunction”
AV-62
to take A
Malfunction is detected in camera con- Camera connection recognition signal

nection recognition signal circuit. circuit. C
D
JSNIA1437GB
E
When either one of the following
items is detected:
• rear control switch power supply and
• Rear control switch power supply
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
and ground circuits.
F
• AV communication signal between
• AV communication circuits between
AV control unit and rear control
AV control unit and multifunction
switch is malfunctioning.
switch. G
• malfunction is detected in AV com-
munication circuits between AV con-
trol unit and multifunction switch.
JSNIA1438GB H
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode I
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted.
2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode”
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the “BACK” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust- J
ment Mode screen.
JSNIA0147GB
Display Diagnosis M
AV
JSNIA0688GB
AV-63
The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB signal error is detected.
R (red) signal error : Light blue (Cyan) tint

G (green) signal error : Purple (Magenta) tint
B (blue) signal error : Yellow tint
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.
JSNIA0149GB
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks

ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed by approximately
ON Parking brake is applied. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released.
ON Light switch ON
Lights Block the light beam from the auto light optical sensor.
OFF Light switch OFF
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi-
ON
tion Changes in indication may be delayed by approximately
Reverse
Shift the selector lever other than 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
OFF
“R” position
Speaker Test
Select “SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS” to display the Speaker Diagnosis
screen. Press “START and NEXT” to generate a test tone in a
speaker. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker.
Press “End” to stop the test tones.
NOTE:
The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.
Squawker : 3 kHz
Front speaker : 300 Hz
Rear speaker : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB
Climate Control
On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT-III is supported.
Refer to HAC-156, "WITHOUT INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM : CONSULT-III Function"for
details.
Camera Cont.
Refer to AV-56, "System Description".
Error History
AV-64
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed. A
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.
B
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of
the following points.
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current location mark at the time an error
occurred. If current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occur- C
rence cannot be located correctly.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depend-
ing on the error item. D
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when IGN switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the
condition is normal at a next IGN ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored.“ The counter can be reset (no error E
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III.
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if F
the condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. “ The counter can be reset (no error
G
Display type of occur-
Error history display item
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication) H
Count up method B Other than the above
JSNIA0151GB AV
Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items
O
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
CAN communication malfunction is detect- P
CAN COMM CIRCUIT then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
ed.
ing to the diagnosis results.
AV-65
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) Replace the AV control unit.
malfunction is detected.
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN Controller Memory Error
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• display unit power supply and ground cir-
cuits are malfunctioning. • Display unit power supply and ground
• serial communication circuits between circuits
Front Display Connection Error
display unit and AV control unit are mal- • Serial communication circuits between
functioning. display unit and AV control unit
• serial communication signal between
display unit and AV control unit is mal-
functioning.
Camera connection recognition signal cir- Camera connection recognition signal cir-
Camera Cont. Unit Connection Error
cuits malfunction is detected. cuit
Rear control switch power supply and Rear control switch power supply and
AV COMM CIRCUIT
ground circuits malfunction are detected. ground circuits.
detected:
• multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between AV ground circuits
• Switches Connection Error control unit and multifunction switch are • AV communication circuits between AV
malfunctioning. control unit and multifunction switch
• AV communication signal between AV
control unit and multifunction switch is
malfunctioning.
AV-66
A
With rear control switch
detected:
• camera control unit power supply and B
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Camera control unit power supply and
• AV communication signal between AV ground circuits
control unit and Camera control unit is • AV communication circuits between mul-
malfunctioning. tifunction switch and rear control switch C
• AV communication circuits between mul- • AV communication circuits between rear
tifunction switch and rear control switch control switch and camera control unit
are malfunctioning.
• AV communication circuits between rear D
• AV COMM CIRCUIT control switch and camera control unit
• Rear view Camera connection Error are malfunctioning.
Without rear control switch E
detected:
• camera control unit power supply and
• Camera control unit power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. F
ground circuits
• AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between mul-
control unit and camera control unit is
tifunction switch and camera control unit
malfunctioning.
• AV communication signal between AV G
malfunctioning.
When either one of the following items is H
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
control unit and multifunction switch are AV communication circuits between AV
• Switches Connection Error I
• Rear view Camera connection Error
malfunctioning.
J
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis
• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not K
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
L
• The error counter is erased if reset.
Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current) M
(Past)
Tx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
JSNIA1287GB
Rx (ECM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
AV
Rx (Cluster) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (BCM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39 O
Rx (USM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
AV COMM Diagnosis P
AV-67
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
ter unit) and each unit.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
• If it resets, the error counter is erased.
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA1439GB
C Tx(ITM–SW) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(RrSeatSW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(RearCamera–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Delete Unit Connection Log

Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed)
JSNIA0154GB
CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV) INFOID:0000000003882712
CONSULT-III FUNCTIONS
CONSULT-III performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit.
Diagnosis mode Description

Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication
Self Diagnostic Result
circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed.
AV COMMUNICATION
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed.
Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter.
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter.
• In CONSULT-III self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.
The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item
Error item Detection logic Possible malfunction factor/Action to take

CAN communication malfunction is detect-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] Refer to AV-72, "Diagnosis Procedure".
ed.
AV-68
A
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis Replace the AV control unit.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Refer to AV-170, "Removal and Installa- B
tion".
Control Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200]
CAN CONT [U1216]
C
detected:
• display unit power supply and ground cir- • Display unit power supply and ground
cuits are malfunctioning. circuits D
• serial communication circuits between Refer to AV-82, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diag-
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243]
display unit and AV control unit are mal- nosis Procedure".
functioning. • Serial communication circuits between
• serial communication signal between display unit and AV control unit E
functioning.
A malfunction is detected in camera con-

Camera connection recognition signal cir- F
CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] cuit
nection recognition signal circuit.
When either one of the following items is G
detected:
• multifunction switch power supply and • Multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. ground circuits
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between AV refer to AV-83, "MULTIFUNCTION H
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] control unit and multifunction switch are SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch
control unit and multifunction switch is I
malfunctioning.
AV
AV-69
detected:
• camera control unit power supply and • Camera control unit power supply and
• AV communication signal between AV Refer to AV-84, "CAMERA CONTROL
control unit and Camera control unit is UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits between mul-
• AV communication circuits between multifunction switch and rear control switch
tifunction switch and rear control switch • AV communication circuits between rear
are malfunctioning. control switch and camera control unit
• AV communication circuits between rear
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] control switch and camera control unit
• REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] are malfunctioning.
Without rear control switch
detected:
• Camera control unit power supply and
ground circuits
Refer to AV-84, "CAMERA CONTROL
UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
malfunctioning.
tifunction switch and camera control unit
malfunctioning.
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
• SWITCH CONN [U1240]
• REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252]
malfunctioning.
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted to the AV control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.
Display Item Display Vehicle status Remarks

On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light
switch is ON .
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor
Off to light when the light switch is OFF —
or ON.
On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position
On Selector lever in R position
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
REV SIG Selector lever in any position other
Off normal.
than R
SELECTION FROM MENU
AV-70
Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the
selected vehicle signals. A
Item to be selected Description

VHCL SPD SIG B
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS”
ILLUM SIG
is selected. C
IGN SIG
REV SIG
D
AV
AV-71
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-22, "CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003882714
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of CON-

DTC Diagnostic item is detected when... Probable malfunction location
SULT-III
When AV control unit is not transmitting or re-
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ceiving CAN communication signal for 2 sec- CAN communication system
onds or more.
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-14, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
AV-72
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
Initial diagnosis of AV control unit. B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

SULT-III D
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003882718 E
1.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit. F
>> INSPECTION END

G
AV
AV-73
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-170, "Removal and Installation".

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control
• It is connected to ECM and combination meter via CAN communication to ob-
• AUX sound signal is input from the auxiliary jacks.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Action to take
CONSULT-III
CONTROL UNIT (AV) AV communication circuit initial diagnosis malfunction is
U1310 Replace AV control unit.
[U1310] detected.
AV-74
A
Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-170, "Removal and Installation". B

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control C
• It is connected to ECM and combination meter via CAN communication to ob- D
• AUX image signal is input from auxiliary jacks. E
• Power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) is transmitted to front display unit. F
G
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display contents of
DTC Detection Condition Action to take
H
CONSULT-III
Cont Unit
U1200 FLASH- ROM AV control unit malfunction is detected. (FLASH-ROM). Replace AV control unit.
I
[U1200]
AV
AV-75

• It is connected to ECM and combination meter via CAN communication to ob-
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CAN CONT Internal malfunction of AV control unit (CAN controller) is
[U1216] detected.
AV-76
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
A
B
C
and operates.
DISPLAY UNIT
chronizing).
• Composite image (DVD, AUX and camera images) signal is input from AV con- D
trol unit.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003882726 E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

F
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes
CONSULT-III
When either one of the following items is detected: G
• display unit power supply and ground circuits are mal- • Display unit power supply and
functioning. ground circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN
U1243 • serial communication circuits between display unit and • Serial communication circuits be-
[U1243] H
AV control unit are malfunctioning. tween display unit and AV control
• serial communication signal between display unit and unit
AV control unit is malfunctioning.

I
1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

J
Check display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-82, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. K
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
M
Display unit AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
AV
11 56
M49 M129 Existed
22 44
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground. O
Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals P
Ground
11
M49 Not existed
22
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV-77
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL

1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector terminal and ground using an oscilloscope.
(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
When adjusting display bright-

M49 11 Ground
ness.
PKIB5039J

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace AV control unit.
Check signal between display unit harness connector terminal and ground using an oscilloscope.
(+)
Connector Terminal

M49 22 Ground
ness.
PKIB5039J

NO >> Replace display unit.
AV-78
U1250 CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
A
B
C
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
• Camera control unit is connected via AV communication. D
E
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CAMERA CONT. CONN Malfunction is detected in camera connection recogni- Camera connection recognition sig- F
U1250
[U1250] tion signal circuit. nal circuit.

G
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and camera control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and camera control unit harness connector.
I
AV control unit Camera control unit
Continuity
M130 68 B251 14 Existed J
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground.
K
AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals Ground
M130 68 Not existed L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. M
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector and camera control unit connector. AV
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector terminal and ground using an oscilloscope.
O
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal P
Connected camera
0V
control unit connector
M130 68 Ground
Disconnect camera
5V
YES >> Replace AV control unit.
AV-79
NO >> Replace camera control unit.
AV-80
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
A
U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta- B
neously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line.
Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
Self-diagnosis results display item C
Display contents of Possible malfunction factor/Action to

DTC Description
CONSULT-III take
D
When either one of the following items is detected: • Multifunction switch power supply
• multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits and ground circuits
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
are malfunctioning. Refer toAV-83, "MULTIFUNCTION
U1300 [U1300] E
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit and SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
U1240 • SWITCH CONN
multifunction switch are malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits be-
[U1240]
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and tween AV control unit and multi-
multifunction switch is malfunctioning. function switch
F
• Camera control unit power supply
and ground circuits
When either one of the following items is detected:
Refer to AV-84, "CAMERA CON-
• camera control unit power supply and ground circuits
are malfunctioning.
TROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce- G
dure".
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and
• AV communication circuits be-
camera control unit is malfunctioning.
tween multifunction switch and rear
• AV communication circuits between multifunction H
control switch
• AV COMM CIRCUIT switch and rear control switch are malfunctioning.
• AV communication circuits be-
U1300 [U1300] • AV communication circuits between rear control switch
tween rear control switch and cam-
U1252 • REAR-CAMERA LAN and camera control unit are malfunctioning.
era control unit
CONN [U1252] I
Without rear control switch • Camera control unit power supply
When either one of the following items is detected: and ground circuits
• camera control unit power supply and ground circuits Refer to AV-84, "CAMERA CON-
are malfunctioning. TROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce- J
• malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits dure".
between multifunction switch and camera control unit. • AV communication circuits be-
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and tween multifunction switch and
multifunction switch is malfunctioning. camera control unit K
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300]
U1300 • AV communication circuits between AV control unit and AV communication circuits between
• SWITCH CONN L
U1240 multifunction switch are malfunctioning. AV control unit and multifunction
[U1240]
U1252 • AV communication signal between AV control unit and switch
• REAR-CAMERA LAN
multifunction switch is malfunctioning.
CONN [U1252]
M
AV
AV-81
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003901202
1.CHECK FUSE
Power source Fuse No.

Battery 31
Ignition switch ON or START 4
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
Check voltage between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Voltage (Approx.)
M127
ACC power supply 7 ACC Battery voltage
Ignition signal M131 104 ON
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between AV control unit and fuse.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connectors and ground.
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity
M127 20
Ground OFF Existed
M131 85
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003901446
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (DISPLAY SIDE)

Check voltage between display unit harness connector and ground.
Inverter VCC 2
M49 ACC 9V
Signal VCC 3
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
AV-82
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect the harness connector between display unit and AV control unit.
B
Signal name Continuity
Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No.
C
2 59
Ground M49 M129 Existed
3 47
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground. D
Display unit
Connector No. Terminal No. E
Ground
Inverter VCC 2
M49 Not existed
Signal VCC 3
F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. G
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT SIDE)
1. Connect the AV control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ACC. H
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Voltage (Approx.) I
Inverter VCC 59
M129 ACC 9V
Signal VCC 47
J
YES >> INSPECTED END.
K
2. Disconnect display unit connector. L
Display unit
Signal name Continuity M
Connector No. Terminal No. Ground
Ground M49 1 Existed
Is inspection result normal? AV
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH O
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003901204
P
1.CHECK FUSE

AV-83
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.
ACC power supply M125 3 ACC Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between multifunction switch and fuse.
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground.
Ground M125 1 OFF Existed
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003901205
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 31
Ignition switch ACC 19
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
B251 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between camera control unit and fuse.
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
Ground B251 31 OFF Existed
AV-84
NO >> Repair harness or connector. A
AV
AV-85
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT)
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M49 17 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
Start Confirmation / Adjustment

mode, and then display color bar
M49 17 Ground
by selecting “Color Spectrum Bar”
on DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS screen.
SKIB2238J

YES >> Replace display unit.
AV-86
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT)
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY
A
UNIT)
B
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit or NAVI control unit with RGB signal to the display unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
E
Continuity
M49 6 M129 39 Existed F
Display unit
G
Continuity
M49 6 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. I
2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL
J
K
(+)
Connector Terminal L
Start Confirmation / Adjustment M

M49 6 Ground
AV
SKIB2236J

YES >> Replace display unit. O
AV-87
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT)
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
Display unit
Continuity
M49 18 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal

M49 18 Ground
SKIB2237J

AV-88
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY
UNIT)
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DIS-
A
PLAY UNIT)
B
Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed with
AV control unit or NAVI control unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT

D
E

Continuity
F
G
Display unit
Continuity
H
M49 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. I
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
J
K
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
M49 19 Ground —
AV
SKIB3603E
Is inspection result normal? O

P
AV-89
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit or NAVI control unit with RGB area (YS)
signal to display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector terminal 9 and ground.
Display unit
Continuity
M49 9 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
When RGB image is displayed. Approx. 5 V
M49 9 Ground
When AUX image is displayed.
PKIB4948J

AV-90
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizon- B
tal synchronizing (HP) signal from display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003901211 C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

E
Continuity

G
Display unit
Continuity
M49 8 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL

1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. J
K
(+)
M
M49 8 Ground —
AV
SKIB3601E

O
P
AV-91
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizon-
1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
Display unit
Continuity
M49 20 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 20 Ground —
SKIB3598E

AV-92
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Transmits the image signal of external device from auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT C

2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D
Auxiliary input jacks AV control unit

Continuity E
7 66
M253 M130 Existed
8 74 F
4. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and ground.
Auxiliary input jacks G

Continuity
M253 7 Not existed
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and AV control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
3. Make AUX image signal being input.
4. Check signal between auxiliary input jacks harness connector using an oscilloscope.
K
(+) (−)
Auxiliary input jacks Auxiliary input jacks Condition Reference value
L
M253 7 M253 8 When AUX image is displayed.
AV
SKIB2251J

NO >> Check that there is no malfunction in the external device.
P
AV-93
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Multifunction switch AV control unit

Continuity
M125 14 M131 103 Existed
Multifunction switch
Continuity
M125 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect multifunction switch connector and AV control unit connector.
(+)
AV control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
Pressing the eject switch. 0V
M131 103 Ground
YES >> Replace preset switch.
AV-94
REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY
A
• Camera control unit outputs camera ON signal to rear view camera and inputs rear view camera image sig- B
nal from rear view camera when the reverse signal is input.
• The camera control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the AV
control unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT D

2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connec- E
tor.
Camera control unit Rear view camera F

Continuity
B251 8 T103 1 Existed
4. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground. G
Camera control unit

Continuity H
B251 8 Not existed
Is inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA ON SIGNAL J
1. Connect camera control unit connector and rear view camera connector.
K
3. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
L
Camera control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Selector le- M
ver in R posi- 6.0 V
tion.
B251 8 Ground Other than AV
selector le-
0V
ver in R posi-
tion.
O
YES >> Replace rear view camera.
P
AV-95
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• Camera control unit outputs camera ON signal to rear view camera and inputs rear view camera image sig-
• The camera control unit that inputs the camera image signal transmits the camera image signal to the dis-
play unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
Camera control unit AV control unit

Continuity
11 64
B251 M130 Existed
12 65
Camera control unit

Continuity
B251 12 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect camera control unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector using an oscilloscope.
(+)
Camera control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal
When rear view camera

B251 12 Ground
image is displayed.
SKIB2251J

AV-96
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
AV control unit that inputs the camera image signal and AUX image signal transmits the composite image sig- B
nal to the display unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT)
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and display unit connector. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and display unit harness connector.
AV control unit Display unit E

Continuity
36 15
M129 M49 Existed F
37 5
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground.
G
AV control unit
Continuity
H
M129 36 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. I
2.CHECK COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT TO DISPLAY UNIT)
1. Connect AV control unit connector and display unit connector. J
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector using an oscilloscope.
K
(+) (−)
AV control unit Condition Reference value
L
Connector Terminal
M
Ground
When AUX or camera image is dis-
M129 36
played.
AV
SKIB2251J

P
AV-97
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• Steering angle sensor signal 1, 2 detects the turning direction and quantity of the steering and transmits it to
the camera control unit.
• Steering angle sensor signal 3 detects the neutral position of the steering and transmits it to the camera con-
trol unit.
• Camera control unit performs the correction of neutral position with sensor signal 1, 2, 3 and vehicle speed
signal.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect camera control unit connector and steering angle sensor connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and steering angle sensor harness con-
nector.
Camera control unit Steering angle sensor

Continuity
23 3
B251 24 M30 6 Existed
25 8
Camera control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminals
23 Ground
B251 24 Not existed
25
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SIGNAL SENSOR SIGNAL
1. Connect camera control unit connector.
3. Check voltage between camera control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Camera control unit
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminals
23
B251 24 Ground 5.0 V
25
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Connect steering angle sensor connector.
AV-98
4. Check signal between camera control unit harness connector and ground. A
(+)
Camera control unit (−) Condition Reference value B
Connector Terminals
Turn the steering to the right

D
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
E
B: Sensor signal 2
23, 24 Ground
B251 Turn the steering to the left G
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1 H
B: Sensor signal 2
Turn the steering around the

25 Ground J
neutral position
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3 K
B: Sensor signal 1
YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO >> Replace steering angle sensor.
AV
AV-99
Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit.

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector.
AV control unit Spiral cable

Continuity
AV control unit
Continuity
M127 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and spiral cable connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.
(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
M127 6 M127 15 3.3 V
YES >> GO TO 4.
AV-100
A
minals 14 to 17 and 15 to 17.
B
D
JSNIA0215GB
Standard
E
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
nector nal nector nal
F
MENU DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
MENU UP switch ON 119 – 123
M303 M303 17 G
SOURCE switch ON 1
15
AV
AV-101

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT


Continuity
AV control unit
Continuity
M127 16 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector.
(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit
(Approx.)
M127 16 M127 15 3.3 V
YES >> GO TO 4.
AV-102
A
B
D
JSNIA0215GB
Standard
E
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
F
MENU DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
M303 M303 17 G
SOURCE switch ON 1
15
AV
AV-103

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT


Continuity
4. Connect AV control unit connector.
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV control unit
Continuity
M127 15 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check steering switch. Refer to AV-105, "Component Inspection".
AV-104
A
B
D
JSNIA0215GB
Standard
E
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
F
MENU DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
M303 M303 17 G
SOURCE switch ON 1
15
AV
AV-105
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM]
ECU DIAGNOSIS
AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000003897072
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

CONSULT-III data monitor item
Dis-
Display Item Vehicle status Remarks
play
On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) mal.
On Parking brake is applied. Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-

PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released. mal.
On Light switch ON.

ILLUM SIG —
Off Light switch OFF.
On Ignition switch ON.
IGN SIG —
Off Ignition switch in ACC position.
On Selector lever in R position.
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
Off mal.
than R.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA1440ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
AV-106
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal A
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
2 3
Ignition C
Sound signal front LH Output switch Sound output.
(W) (B)
ON
D
SKIB3609E
E
Ignition
4 5
Sound signal rear LH Output switch Sound output.
(O/B) (W/R)
ON F
SKIB3609E
Keep pressing SOURCE G

0V
switch.
Ignition
(W/G) (L/B) H
ON 1.3 V
Keep pressing switch.
Ignition I
7
(V/W)
ACC
Ignition Lighting switch is OFF. 0V J
9
Ground Illumination signal Input switch
(R/L) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V
OFF
Ignition
11 12
Sound signal front RH Output switch Sound output.
(B/W) (BR)
ON
L
SKIB3609E
M
Ignition AV
13 14
Sound signal rear RH Output switch Sound output.
(L) (B/W)
ON
O
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(L/B) ground P
ON
0V
switch.
Ignition
16 15
Steering switch signal B Input switch Keep pressing VOL UP
(GR/L) (L/B) 0.7 V
ON switch.
AV-107
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
19
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
20
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B/W)
ON
34 — AM–FM main Input — — —
Ignition
ACC
Ignition
36 When camera image or
Ground Composite image signal Output switch
(B) AUX image is displayed.
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
37 Composite image signal
(W) ground
ON
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
38 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB image signal (B: blue) Output switch
(B) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J
Ignition
39 RGB image signal (G: play color bar by selecting
Ground Output switch
(R) green) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
Ignition
Ground RGB image signal (R: red) Output switch
(W) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J
Ignition
41
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output switch —
(G)
ON
SKIB3603E
AV-108
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
RGB synchronizing signal B
42 — — — — —
shield
When RGB image is dis-
5.0 V
played. C
Ignition
43 D
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
(B) When camera image or
ON
AUX image is displayed.
E
PKIB4948J
F
Ignition
44 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(G) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON G
PKIB5039J
H
Ignition
45 Horizontal synchronizing I
Ground Input switch —
(W) (HP) signal
ON
J
SKIB3601E
Ignition
46
Ground Signal ground — switch — —
(LG) K
ACC
Ignition
47
Ground Signal VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(O)
ACC L
49 — Shield — — — —
50 — RGB signal Shield — — — —
M
55 — Shield — — — —
AV
Ignition
(R) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON
O
PKIB5039J
Ignition
57 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
(R) signal
ON
SKIB3598E
AV-109
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
58
Ground Inverter ground — switch — —
(BR)
ACC
Ignition
59
Ground Inverter VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(Y)
ACC
Camera image signal
64 — — — — —
shield
Ignition
65 When camera image is dis-
Ground Camera image signal Input switch
(Y) played.
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
66 Composite (AUX) image When AUX image is dis-
Ground Input switch
(G) signal played.
ON
SKIB2251J
Connected to camera con-

Ignition 0V
68 Camera connection recog- trol unit connector.
Ground Input switch
(W) nition signal Not connected to camera
ON 5.0 V
control unit connector.
Composite image signal
73 — — — — —
shield
Ignition
74 Composite (AUX) image
(V) signal ground
ON
Ignition
85
(B/W)
ON
86 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
87 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
— — — —
(W) (H) Output
— — — —
(B) (L) Output
Ignition
95 97
AUX sound signal RH Input switch AUX sound input.
(W) (R)
ON
SKIB3609E
AV-110
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
96 97 C
AUX sound signal LH Input switch AUX sound input.
(B) (R)
ON
SKIB3609E D
Ignition
101
Ground Switch ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON E
Ignition Pressing the eject switch. 0V
103
Ground Disk eject signal Input switch
(SB) Except for above. 3.3 V
ON
F
Ignition
104
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(O)
ON
G
Ignition Selector lever in R position. 12.0 V
105
Ground Reverse signal Input switch Other than selector lever in
(P/B) 0V
ON R position.
H
Parking brake ON. 0V
I
Ignition
106
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(G/R) Parking brake OFF.
ON
J
JSNIA0007GB
NOTE: K
The maximum voltage varies de-
pending on the specification
(destination unit).
L
Ignition
107 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(V/W) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25MPH).
ON
M
JSNIA0012GB
AV
111 — Shield — — — —
*:Stereo sounds are input only when the 2 channel stereo sound is played.
O
AV-111
AV CONTROL UNIT
Wiring Diagram — BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM — INFOID:0000000003882775
JCNWM0882GB
AV-112
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0883GB
AV-113
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0884GB
AV-114
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0885GB
AV-115
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0886GB
AV-116
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0887GB
AV-117
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0888GB
AV-118
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0889GB
AV-119
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0890GB
AV-120
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0891GB
AV-121
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0892GB
AV-122
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0893GB
AV-123
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0894GB
AV-124
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0895GB
AV-125
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0896GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
DTC Index INFOID:0000000003882776
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM
AV-126
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Display item Refer to A

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] AV-72, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010] AV-73, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] AV-74, "DTC Logic"
B
U1200 Control Unit FLASH-ROM [U1200] AV-75, "DTC Logic"

U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-76, "DTC Logic" C
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-77, "Diagnosis Procedure"
AV-84, "CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
U1250 CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250]
dure" D
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-81, "Description"
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240]
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] E
U124E • AMP CONN [U124E]
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248] F
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248] AV-81, "Description"
G
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN [U1248]
U1252 • REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] H
AV
AV-127
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0006ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B/W)
ON
ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(Y)
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(O)
ACC
4 — — — — —
shield
Ignition
(W) ground
ON
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
7 — RGB ground — — — —
Ignition
8 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Output switch —
(W) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E
AV-128
DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
When RGB image is dis- B
5.0 V
played.
Ignition
C
9
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch When camera image, DVD
(B)
ON image or AUX image is dis-
played. D
PKIB4948J
Ignition
11 Communication signal When adjusting display F
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
G
Ignition
13
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR) H
ON
Ignition
14
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON I
Ignition When rear view camera im- J

15
Ground Composite image signal Input switch age, DVD image or AUX
(B)
ON image is displayed.
K
SKIB2251J
Start confirmation/adjust- L
Ignition
Ground RGB image signal (R: red) Input switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
M
screen.
SKIB2238J
AV
Ignition
18 play color bar by O
Ground RGB image signal (B: blue) Input switch
(B) selecting“Color Spectrum
ON
Bar” on DISPLAY DIAGNO-
SIS screen.
SKIB2237J
P
AV-129
DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
19
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(G)
ON
SKIB3603E
Ignition
(R) signal
ON
SKIB3598E
21 — RGB synchronizing ground — — — —
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J
23 — Shield — — — —
AV-130
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0882GB
P
AV-131
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0883GB
AV-132
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0884GB
AV-133
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0885GB
AV-134
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0886GB
AV-135
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0887GB
AV-136
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0888GB
AV-137
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0889GB
AV-138
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0890GB
AV-139
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0891GB
AV-140
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0892GB
AV-141
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0893GB
AV-142
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0894GB
AV-143
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0895GB
AV-144
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0896GB
NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION P
SWITCH virtually.
AV-145
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA0007ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
5 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
6 When rear view camera im-
(B) age is displayed.
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
7
Ground Rear view camera ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON

8
Ground Camera power supply Output switch Other than selector lever in
(R) 0V
ON R position.
11 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Ground Camera image signal Output switch
(BR) age is displayed.
ON
SKIB2251J

Ignition 0V
(GR) nition signal Not connected to camera
ON 5.0 V
— — — —
(P) (L) Output
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
AV-146
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition Selector lever in R position. 12.0 V B

22
(W) 0V
ON R position.
C
D
Turn the steering to the
right.
SKIB3827E
E
A: Sensor signal 1
Ignition B: Sensor signal 2
23
Ground Sensor signal 1 Input switch
(G) F
ON
G
Turn the steering to the left.
SKIB3828E H
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
Turn the steering to the J

right.
SKIB3827E
K
A: Sensor signal 1
24
(SB)
ON L

M
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
AV
B: Sensor signal 2
Ignition
25 Turn the steering around
Ground Sensor signal 3 Input switch P
(O) the neutral position.
ON
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
AV-147
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(O) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH).
ON
JSNIA0012GB
Ignition
30
(V)
ACC
Ignition
31
(B/R)
ON
Ignition
32
(Y)
OFF
AV-148
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0882GB
P
AV-149
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0883GB
AV-150
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0884GB
AV-151
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0885GB
AV-152
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0886GB
AV-153
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0887GB
AV-154
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0888GB
AV-155
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0889GB
AV-156
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0890GB
AV-157
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0891GB
AV-158
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0892GB
AV-159
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0893GB
AV-160
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0894GB
AV-161
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0895GB
AV-162
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0896GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-163
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
RELATED TO VEHICLE INFORMATION

• All switches cannot be operated.
• “Multi AV” is displayed on system se- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
lection display when the CONSULT- Refer to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
III is initialized.
• All switches cannot be operated AV control unit power supply and ground circuits mal-
• “Multi AV” is not displayed on system function.
Multifunction switch and preset selection screen when the CON- Refer to AV-82, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
switch operation does not work. SULT-III is initialized. dure".
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction.
Replace multifunction switch or preset switch.
Only specified switch cannot be operat- For multifunction switch, refer to AV-176, "Removal and
ed Installation".
For preset switch, refer to AV-177, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-
Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
Fuel economy display, vehicle set- III self-diagnosis result
ting operation is abnormal There is no malfunction in the self-diag- Ignition signal. Refer to AV-82, "AV CONTROL UNIT :
nosis results Diagnosis Procedure".
RELATED TO REAR VIEW MONITOR
Probable malfunction location / Action

Symptoms Check items
to take
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III self-diagno-
It cannot be switched to rear view Refer to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Function
sis result.
monitor even when the selector le- (MULTI AV)".
ver is in the reverse position. There is not malfunction in the CONSULT-III self-diag- Reverse signal circuit malfunction.(AV
nosis result. control unit)
• Rear view camera power supply cir-
cuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-84, "CAMERA CON-
TROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Camera image is not shown. AUX images are normal.
• Camera image signal circuit malfunc-
tion.
Refer to AV-96, "Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
Possible route line is indicated ab-
The “Steer. Angle Sensor” is not turned ON at “Con- Steering angle sensor signal circuits.
normally when camera image is dis-
nection Confirmation” of “Camera Cont.” Refer to AV-98, "Diagnosis Procedure".
played.
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal
circuit malfunction between AV con-
trol unit and display unit.
dure".
Camera image is rolling. AUX image is rolling
• Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal cir-
cuit malfunction between AV control
unit and display unit.
dure".
RELATED TO RGB IMAGE
AV-164
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take A

• Display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
tion.
Refer to AV-82, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
• All RGB images are not shown. B
dure".
• Composite images are not dis-
• Communication Circuit malfunction between AV control
played.(camera and AUX image)
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. C
Refer to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• All RGB images are not shown.
RGB image is not shown. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
• Camera image is normal.
• AUX images are not displayed.
Refer to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)". D
• All RGB images are not shown. AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
• “Multi AV” is not displayed on system tion.
selection screen when the CONSULT- Refer to AV-82, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce- E
III is initialized. dure".
RGB area (YS) signal circuit malfunction.
• Composite images are normal. (cam- F
era and AUX image)
RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction between AV con-
Light blue (Cyan) tint. trol unit and display unit.
G
RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction between AV

Color of RGB image is not
Purple (Magenta) tint. control unit and display unit.
proper. (All RGB image) H
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction between AV con-
Screen looks yellowish. trol unit and display unit.
Refer to AV-88, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
RGB synchronizing signal circuit malfunction between AV
RGB screen is rolling. All RGB screen is rolling. control unit and display unit.
J
RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take K

Disk eject signal circuit.
The CD cannot be removed. —
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. L
No sound from all speakers.
Refer to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)"
Audio sound is not heard. Sound is not heard only from the specific
places (RH front, RH rear, LH front and Sound signal circuit of suspect system M
LH rear).
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal. Antenna amp. ON signal circuit.
AV
Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom
Symptoms Probable malfunction location
O
Steering switch signal GND circuit. Refer toAV-105, "Component In-
spection".
Only specified switch cannot be operated Replace steering switch. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View". P
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”
Steering switch signal A circuit. Refer to AV-100, "Diagnosis Procedure".
switches do not work.
Steering switch's “VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN” switches do not
Steering switch signal B circuit. Refer to AV-102, "Diagnosis Procedure".
work.
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT

NOTE:
AV-165
Check that there is no malfunction of AUX equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location

No voice sound is heard when Voice sound is heard when other modes AUX sound signal circuits malfunction between auxiliary
AUX mode is selected. are selected. input jacks and AV control unit.
• RGB area synchronizing (YS) signal circuit malfunc-
tion between AV control unit and display unit.
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal circuit malfunc-
displayed in black and nothing can be dis-
played
AUX image is not displayed • Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit malfunction
between AV control unit and display unit.
AUX image signal circuit malfunction between auxiliary
Camera image is normal. input jacks and AV control unit.
RELATED TO REAR CONTROL SWITCH

Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer
None of the rear control switch operations
— to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI
work.
AV)".
AV-166
A
BASIC OPERATIONS B
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display. C
No image is displayed. The system in the video mode. Push <DISC> to change the mode.
The display is turned off. Push <Day/Night> to turn on the display.
D
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction. E
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the multi AV system.
F
RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic
interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction. G
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper-
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE: H
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incor-
rectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the red book Compact Disc I
Standard and may not play.
Symptom Cause and Counter measure

J
Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone K
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature. L
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music
CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, M
the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in com-
pliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the AV
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD is protected by copyright. O
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD, or if it is a multisession disc, some
the music starts playing. time may be required before the music starts playing. P
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.
AV-167
Move immediately to the next song When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma”,
when playing or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other
sources, is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.
AV-168
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
WARNING: D
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
F
connectors.
G
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM H
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit. I
J
K
PKIA0306E
AV
O
PKIA0307E
AV-169
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [BASE AUDIO AND DISPLAY SYSTEM]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
AV CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL
Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1034ZZ
1. AV control unit 2. Bracket LH 3. A/C auto amp.

4. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
3. Remove AV control unit with A/C amp. as a single unit from the body.
4. Remove bracket screws, and then remove AV control unit.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
AV-170
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA1035ZZ
F
1. Display unit
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003940157 G
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". H
2. Remove display unit mounting screws, and then disconnect the display unit connector.
3. Remove display unit.
I
INSTALLATION
J
AV
AV-171
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
JPNIA1036ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-30, "DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation" (driver side) or
2. Remove front door speaker mounting bolts, disconnect the front door speaker connector.
3. Remove front door speaker.
INSTALLATION
AV-172
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA1037ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-36, "Removal and Installation". G
2. Remove rear door speaker mounting bolts, disconnect the rear door speaker connector.
3. Remove rear door speaker.
INSTALLATION H
AV
AV-173
FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
JPNIA1038ZZ
1. Front squawker
REMOVAL
1. Remove the speaker grille with squawker. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front squawker mounting screws, lift up the front squawker and disconnect front squawker con-
nector.
3. Remove front squawker.
INSTALLATION
AV-174
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
A
D
JPNIA1032ZZ
E
2. Antenna amp.
F
REMOVAL
G
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-175
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1052ZZ
1. Cluster lid D
2. Multifunction switch
REMOVAL
2. Remove multifunction switch mounting screws.
3. Remove multifunction switch.
INSTALLATION
AV-176
PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA1044ZZ
H
1. Preset switch 2. Cluster lid C

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". J
2. Remove preset switch mounting screws.
3. Remove preset switch.
K
1. Preset switch
A. Screw
B. Screw L
JPNIA1045ZZ AV
INSTALLATION
NOTE: O
When installing preset switch, do not allow the print wire that connects preset switch and multifunction switch
to get caught in between AV control unit and preset switch.
P
AV-177
REAR CONTROL SWITCH
REAR CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
Refer to SE-98, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1046ZZ
1. Rear control switch

A. Clip
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear control switch, stretching pawls of armrest assembly.
2. Disconnect rear control switch connector.
3. Remove rear control switch.
INSTALLATION
AV-178
A
REMOVAL B
Refer to IP-22, "Removal and Installation".
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA1048ZZ
F
1. Auxiliary input jacks
REMOVAL
1. Remove console finisher. Refer to IP-22, "Removal and Installation". H
2. Remove auxiliary mounting screws.
3. Remove auxiliary input jacks.
I
INSTALLATION
J
AV
AV-179
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JPNIA1049ZZ
1. Camera control unit
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear wheelhouse finisher RH. Refer to INT-57, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove camera control unit mounting screws, disconnect the camera control unit connector.
3. Remove camera control unit.
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is the reverse order of removal.
2. Perform predicted course line center position adjustment. Refer to AV-47, "PREDICTED COURSE LINE
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Repair Requirement".
AV-180
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
DISASSEMBLY B
JPNIA1050ZZ E
1. Rear view camera

2. Seal F
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.

G
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk lid finisher inner. Refer to INT-59, "Removal and Installation". H
2. Remove trunk lid finisher. Refer to EXT-38, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove rear view camera mounting clip, disconnect the rear view camera connector.
4. Remove rear view camera. I
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is the reverse order of removal. J
Adjustment INFOID:0000000003970920
Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera. K
1. Draw lines on rearward area of the vehicle passing through the
following points: 200 mm (7.87 in) from both sides of the vehicle,
and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the L
bumper.
2. Set into “Adjust offset of rear view camera” mode of Confirma-
tion / Adjustment mode.
M
AV
SKIB3691E
AV-181
REAR VIEW CAMERA
3. Rotate the center dial, and then select the guiding line pattern so
that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the
vehicle.
Selected pattern :7
4. Fine adjust the guiding line so that its position is aligned to the
correction line by pressing the up/down/left/right switches.
Pressing “ENTER” enable the camera control unit to memory
the adjusted guiding line position.
SKIB3689E
Up/Down adjustment range : −20 – 20
Left/Right adjustment range : −20 – 20
CAUTION:
Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data.
If Confirmation/Adjustment mode does not function in the above procedure, perform one of the
following service to adjust the index again.
• Remove battery for five min. Then reconnect battery.
• Remove camera control unit connector for five min. Then reconnect camera control unit connec-
tor.
AV-182
A
REMOVAL B
Refer to SR-9, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
C
JSNIA0135ZZ
F
1. Spiral cable
2. Steering angle sensor
G
REMOVAL H
1. Remove spiral cable.
2. Remove steering angle sensor mounting screws.
3. Remove steering angle sensor. I
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. J
AV
AV-183
JPNIA1033GB
AV-184
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSNIA0732GB M

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-284, "DTC Index". AV
DETAILED FLOW
O
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
YES >> GO TO 2.
AV-185
tion (MULTI AV)".
NOTE:
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-284, "DTC Index".
>> GO TO 5.
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
NOTE:
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
YES >> GO TO 1.
AV-186
A
B
WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR

C
nal.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Spe- D
1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF PREDICTED COURSE LINE E

F
G
INFOID:0000000003765635
When camera control unit is replaced, the center position of predicted course line shall be corrected. H

quirement INFOID:0000000003765636 I

Refer to the following for details. J
Repair Requirement". K
PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description L
INFOID:0000000003765637
Adjust the center position of the possible route line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted.
M
AV
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.DRIVING P
>> END
AV-187
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
JSNIA1296GB
NOTE:
• The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION
SWITCH virtually.
• A radio antenna base integrated with radio antenna amp. is adopted.
• Woofer illustrated in the above figure, integrates two woofers and a woofer amp.
System name System explanation

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM AV-196, "System Description"
• AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while re-
combination meter.
transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function.
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Refer to the following “DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM”.
AV-188
MULTI AV SYSTEM
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, combination A
B
of display and display control and receives the response signal from display unit.
NOTE:
AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis. C
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM D
• DVD player is connected with AV control unit via AV communication, and controlled by AV control unit.
• DVD image signal is output from DVD player to display unit via AV control unit.
• DVD stereo (2ch) sound signal is output from DVD player to each speaker via AV control unit and BOSE E
amp.
• DVD surround (5.1ch) sound signal is output from DVD player to each speaker via BOSE amp.
switch and rear control switch transmits operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication. F
JSNIA1299GB
K
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM
• Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks.
switch and rear control switch transmits operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication. L
AV
JSNIA1301GB
AV-189
MULTI AV SYSTEM
JPNIA1058ZZ
1. Front squawker RH 2. Center speaker 3. Front squawker LH

4. Front door speaker LH 5. Rear door speaker LH 6. Rear control switch
7. Rear squawker LH 8. Woofer LH 9. BOSE amp.
10. Rear view camera 11. Woofer RH 12. Camera control unit
13. Rear squawker RH 14. Antenna amp. 15. Rear door speaker RH
22. DVD player 23. Multifunction switch 24. Display unit
A. Trunk room upper RH B. Trunk room side RH C. Within rear pillar finisher RH
D. Spiral cable part E. In center console F. In grove box
AV-190
MULTI AV SYSTEM

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system, and it is connected to each control B
• It is connected to ECM and combination meter via CAN communication to ob- C
• It is connected to BCM via CAN communication transmitting/receiving for the
AV CONTROL UNIT
• Composite image signal (AUX and DVD images) is input from DVD player.
D
• Composite image (DVD, AUX and camera images) signal is output to display
unit. E
• Sound signal (DVD and AUX sounds) is input from the DVD player.
• It receives the power (signal VCC and inverter VCC) from the AV control unit F
and operates.
DISPLAY UNIT
chronizing).
G
• Composite image (DVD, AUX and camera images) signal is input from AV con-
trol unit.
Inputs sound signal from AV control unit and DVD player, and outputs sound sig- H
BOSE AMP.
nal to woofer and each speaker.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp.
WOOFER
• Outputs low frequency sound. I
FRONT SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. J
REAR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound (high and mid range). K
REAR SQUAWKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. L
CENTER SPEAKER
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where camera, audio,
DVD and auxiliary input operations are integrated. M
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air
conditioner operations are integrated. AV
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by wiring harness.
O
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT P
REAR VIEW CAMERA
AV-191
MULTI AV SYSTEM
• Used for hands-free phone operation.
MICROPHONE • Mic. signal is transmitted to NAVI control unit
• Power (Mic. VCC) is supplied from NAVI control unit.
• The operations of audio, etc. can be performed.
STEERING SWITCH
It transmits the playback DVD image signal and DVD sound signal to the AV con-
DVD PLAYER
trol unit.
• The image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the DVD player and AV con-
trol unit to the display unit.
• The sound signal of the auxiliary input is output via the DVD player and AV con-
trol unit to the BOSE amp.
The image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the AV control unit to the dis-
play, and it outputs the sound signal to the AV control unit.
• Operations for audio, etc. are possible.
AV-192
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
A
JSNIA1378GB
NOTE: G
SWITCH virtually.
I
display unit.
Function
J
AM/FM radio
CD
K
Operating Signal
or steering switch.
switch.
Screen Display
AV
AM/FM Radio Mode
received.
• Sound signal is input to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker for AV control unit.
CD Mode
• AV control unit outputs sound signal to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker
when CD is inserted to AV control unit.
AV-193
AUDIO SYSTEM
JPNIA1058ZZ

AV-194
AUDIO SYSTEM

• The AM/FM receiving function and the CD playing function are equipped. B
AV CONTROL UNIT
• Sound signal is transmitted to BOSE amp.
DISPLAY UNIT
• RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit. C
Inputs sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound signal to woofer and
BOSE AMP.
each speaker.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. D
WOOFER
• Outputs low frequency sound.
FRONT SPEAKER
• Outputs sound (mid and low range). E
REAR SPEAKER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. F
FRONT SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
G
CENTER SPEAKER
• Each audio operation can be operated. H
• The preset switch is connected via AV communication, and it transmits the op- I
PRESET SWITCH
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hard-wire.
• Each audio operation can be operated. J
STEERING SWITCH
REAR CONTROL SWITCH • The rear control switch is connected via AV communication, and it transmits K
L
AV
AV-195
JSNIA1379GB
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE

camera control unit is input.
image displayed by the communication signal between AV control unit and display unit with the camera
image.
• Camera control unit controls the direction and distance of predicted course line according to the sensor sig-
JSNIA1325GB
AV-196
A
B
C
JSNIA0708GB
H

and sensor signal. I
AV
AV-197
JPNIA1058ZZ

AV-198

• Image on display is transmitted to rear view monitor image by serial communi- B
AV CONTROL UNIT
C
unit.
D
• Superimposes the guiding line and predicted course line to the camera image E
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
dicted course line.
• Camera control unit is connected via AV communication. F
REAR VIEW CAMERA

Steering signal necessary for predicted course line control is transmitted to cam- G
era control unit.
AV
AV-199
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 4-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE:
JSNIA1284GB

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF.
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of
the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display.
ment automatically).
Mode Description
Self Diagnosis
• Diagnoses the connections across system components.
AV-200
Mode Description
A
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color
Display Diagnosis bar display, light and shade check by grey scale display and touch panel
calibration response check.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake, B
Vehicle Signals
C
Climate Control* Not used.
Confirmation/ that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed. D
Adjustment
It can perform the confirmation of a signal connection to the camera con-
trol unit, the calibration of each camera, Correct Draw Line of Camera
Camera Cont.
Image, and Fine Tuning of Birds-Eye View. E
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be F
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory. G
NOTE:
*:On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT-III is supported.
H
STARTING PROCEDURE
2. Turn the audio system OFF. I
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) J
K
L
JSNIA1285GB
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the M

items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
selected.
AV
JSNIA0138GB P
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trou-
ble diagnosis.
AV-201
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-
Con-
line
Normal Green Green
NOTE:
• Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-378, "Removal and Installation".
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined accord-
ing to the following order of priority: red > yellow > gray.
- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a
JSNIA0141GB
• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
not be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and
• Check the applicable display in the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.

to take

unit power supply and ground circuits no malfunction in those components,
JSNIA1326GB
NOTE:
malfunction”
AV-202
to take A
B
items is detected:
• BOSE amp. malfunction is detected. • Replace BOSE amp.
• sound signal circuits between BOSE • Malfunctioning speaker circuits C
amp. and each speaker is malfunc-
tioning.
D
JPNIA1092GB
E
items is detected:
• DVD player power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • DVD player power supply and F
• AV communication circuits between ground circuits
BOSE amp. and DVD player are • AV communication circuits between
malfunctioning. BOSE amp. and DVD player
• AV communication signal between G
AV control unit and DVD player is
malfunctioning.
JSNIA1327GB H
When either one of the following I

items is detected:
• BOSE amp. power supply and
BOSE amp. power supply and ground
circuits J
AV control unit and BOSE amp. is
malfunctioning.
K
JSNIA1328GB
M
Camera connection recognition signal Camera connection recognition signal
circuit is detected. circuit
AV
JSNIA1329GB
O
AV-203
to take

items is detected:
Rear control switch power supply and
ground circuits
JSNIA1330GB

items is detected:
rear control switch and camera con-
munication circuits between rear
trol unit
control switch and camera control
unit.
camera control unit and BOSE amp.
munication circuits between camera
control unit and BOSE amp.
items is detected:
multifunction switch and camera
munication circuits between multi-
control unit
JSNIA1331GB function switch and camera control
unit.
camera control unit and BOSE amp.
control unit and BOSE amp.
Malfunction is detected in AV commu- AV communication circuits between

nication circuits between AV control AV control unit and multifunction
unit and multifunction switch. switch
JSNIA1332GB
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
the “BACK” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust-
ment Mode screen.
JSNIA0147GB
AV-204
Display Diagnosis
A
JSNIA0688GB F

G
H
Vehicle Signals
the signals recognized by the system.
I
K
JSNIA0149GB
L
Vehicle speed M
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed by approximately
ON Parking brake is applied. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released. AV
ON Light switch ON
Lights Block the light beam from the auto light optical sensor.
OFF Light switch OFF
O
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi- P
ON
tion Changes in indication may be delayed by approximately
Reverse
Shift the selector lever other than 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
OFF
“R” position
Speaker Test
AV-205
Select “SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS” to display the Speaker Diagnosis
screen. Press “START and NEXT” to generate a test tone in a
speaker. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker.
Press “End” to stop the test tones.
NOTE:
Squawker : 3 kHz
Front speaker : 300 Hz
Rear speaker : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB
Climate Control
Refer to HAC-156, "WITHOUT INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM : CONSULT-III Function" for
details.
Camera Cont.
Refer to AV-196, "System Description".
Error History
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of
the following points.
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current location mark at the time an error
occurred. If current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occur-
rence cannot be located correctly.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depend-
ing on the error item.
Count up method A
condition is normal at a next IGN ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored.“ The counter can be reset (no error
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if

rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication)
AV-206
JSNIA0151GB
Error item F
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items
G
Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and
ed. H
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
I
AV control unit malfunction is detected. J
Amplifier Temperature Error BOSE amp. malfunction is detected. Replace the BOSE amp.
When either one of the following items is K
detected:
• serial communication circuits between circuits. L
functioning. display unit and AV control unit.
M
functioning.
A malfunction is detected in camera con- Camera connection recognition signal cir-
Camera Cont. Unit Connection Error AV
nection recognition signal circuit. cuit.
Sound signal center speaker circuit is
Center speaker OUT: open Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
open.
Sound signal center speaker circuit is O
Center speaker OUT: short shorted between center speaker signal (+) Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
and center speaker signal (-).
Center speaker OUT: short to ground

Sound signal center speaker circuit to
Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
P
ground is shorted.
Sound signal center speaker circuit to bat-
Center speaker OUT: short to battery Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
tery is shorted.
Sound signal front speaker RH circuit is Check sound signal front speaker RH cir-
FR speaker OUT: open
open. cuit.
AV-207
Sound signal front speaker RH circuit is
Check sound signal front speaker RH cir-
FR speaker OUT: short shorted between front speaker RH signal
cuit.
(+) and front speaker RH signal (-).
Sound signal front speaker RH circuit to Check sound signal front speaker RH cir-
FR speaker OUT: short to ground
ground is shorted. cuit.
FR speaker OUT: short to battery
battery is shorted. cuit.
Sound signal rear speaker RH circuit is Check sound signal rear speaker RH cir-
RR speaker OUT: open
open. cuit.
Sound signal rear speaker RH circuit is
Check sound signal rear speaker RH cir-
RR speaker OUT: short shorted between rear speaker LH signal (+)
cuit.
and rear speaker LH signal (-).
Sound signal rear speaker RH circuit to Check sound signal rear speaker RH cir-
RR speaker OUT: short to ground
Sound signal rear speaker RH circuit to bat- Check sound signal rear speaker RH cir-
RR speaker OUT: short to battery
tery is shorted. cuit.
RR Woofer OUT: open Sound signal woofer RH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
Sound signal woofer RH circuit is shorted
RR Woofer OUT: short between woofer RH signal (+) and woofer Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
RH signal (-).
Sound signal woofer RH circuit to ground is
RR Woofer OUT: short to ground Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
shorted.
Sound signal woofer RH circuit to battery is
RR Woofer OUT: short to battery Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
shorted.
RL Woofer OUT: open Sound signal woofer LH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
Sound signal woofer LH circuit is shorted
RL Woofer OUT: short between woofer LH signal (+) and woofer Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
LH signal (-).
Sound signal woofer LH circuit to ground is
RL Woofer OUT: short to ground Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
shorted.
Sound signal woofer LH circuit to battery is
RL Woofer OUT: short to battery Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
shorted.
Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit is
RL speaker OUT: open Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
open.
RL speaker OUT: short shorted between rear speaker LH signal (+) Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit to
RL speaker OUT: short to ground Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
ground is shorted.
Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit to bat-
RL speaker OUT: short to battery Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
tery is shorted.
Sound signal front speaker LH circuit is Check sound signal front speaker LH cir-
FL speaker OUT: open
open. cuit.
Sound signal front speaker LH circuit is
Check sound signal front speaker LH cir-
FL speaker OUT: short shorted between front speaker LH signal
cuit.
(+) and front speaker LH signal (-).
Sound signal front speaker LH circuit to Check sound signal front speaker LH cir-
FL speaker OUT: short to ground
FL speaker OUT: short to battery
Sound signal front squawker LH circuit is Check sound signal front squawker LH cir-
FL tweeter OUT: open
open. cuit.
AV-208
A
Sound signal front squawker LH circuit is
Check sound signal front squawker LH cir-
FL tweeter OUT: short shorted between front squawker LH signal
cuit.
(+) and front squawker LH signal (-).
Sound signal front squawker LH circuit to Check sound signal front squawker LH cir- B
FL tweeter OUT: short to ground
Sound signal front squawker LH circuit to Check sound signal front squawker LH cir-
FL tweeter OUT: short to battery
battery is shorted. cuit. C
Sound signal front squawker RH circuit is Check sound signal front squawker RH cir-
FR tweeter OUT: open
open. cuit.
Sound signal front squawker RH circuit is D
Check sound signal front squawker RH cir-
FR tweeter OUT: short shorted between front squawker RH signal
cuit.
(+) and front squawker RH signal (-).
Sound signal front squawker RH circuit to Check sound signal front squawker RH cir- E
FR tweeter OUT: short to ground
Sound signal front squawker RH circuit to Check sound signal front squawker RH cir-
FR tweeter OUT: short to battery
F
AV COMM CIRCUIT
G
detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between AV ground circuits. H
malfunctioning. control unit and multifunction switch.
control unit and multifunction switch is I
malfunctioning.
detected: J
• BOSE amp. power supply and ground
• AV COMM CIRCUIT BOSE amp. power supply and ground cir-
circuits are malfunctioning.
• Amplifier Connection Error cuits.
control unit and BOSE amp. is malfunc- K
tionning.
detected: L
• DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits are malfunctioning. • DVD player power supply and ground cir-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between cuits.
• DVD Deck Connection Error BOSE amp. and DVD player are mal- • AV communication circuits between M
functioning. BOSE amp. and DVD player.
control unit and DVD player is malfunc-
tioning. AV
detected:
• AV communication circuits between cam- O
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
era control unit and BOSE amp. are mal- AV communication circuits between cam-
• DVD Deck Connection Error
functioning. era control unit and BOSE amp.
• Amplifier Connection Error
control unit and BOSE amp. is malfunc- P
tioning.
AV-209
detected:
• malfunction is detected in AV communi-
tifunction switch and rear control switch.
cation circuits between rear control
switch and camera control unit.
control switch and camera control unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT cation circuits between camera control
• DVD Deck Connection Error unit and NAVI control unit.
• Amplifier Connection Error Without rear control switch
• Rear view Camera connection Error When either one of the following items is
detected:
AV communication circuits between multi-
cation circuits between multifunction
function switch and camera control unit.
cation circuits between camera control
unit and NAVI control unit.
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• Switches Connection Error
• Rear view Camera connection Error
malfunctioning.

• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays "OK" if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays "0" if a malfunction is detected. It
Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
JSNIA1287GB
Rx (BCM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
Rx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
AV COMM Diagnosis
• The error counter displays "OK" if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays "0" if a malfunction is detected. It
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA1288GB
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
AV-210
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past) A
C Rx(Amp–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
B
C Rx(DVD–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(AmpAudio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39 C
C Rx(DVDAudio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39

D
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed)
E
G
JSNIA0154GB
H
I
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication J
K
AV COMMUNICATION
L
AV&NAVI C/U
M
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected. AV
O
ed. P
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Refer toAV-378, "Removal and Installation"
AV-378, "Removal and Installation".
CAN CONT [U1216]
AV-211
Replace the BOSE amp.
AMP TEMP [U1231] BOSE amp. is detected. Refer to AV-386, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
detected:
• Display unit power supply and ground
cuits are malfunctioning.
circuits
• serial communication circuits between
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] Refer to AV-222, "Diagnosis Procedure".
display unit and AV control unit are mal-
• Serial communication circuits between
functioning.
display unit and AV control unit
functioning.
Camera connection recognition signal cir-
CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] cuit
cuit malfunction is detected.
CENTER SP OPEN [U1260] Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
open.
CENTER SP SHORT [U1261] shorted between center speaker signal (+) Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
CENTER SP GND-SHORT [U1262] Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
ground is shorted.
CENTER SP VB-SHORT [U1263] Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
tery is shorted.
FR-DOOR SP OPEN [U1264]
open. cuit.
FR-DOOR SP SHORT [U1265] shorted between front speaker RH signal
cuit.
FR-DOOR SP GND-SHORT [U1266]
FR-DOOR SP VB-SHORT [U1267]
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER OPEN [U1268]
open. cuit.
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER SHORT [U1269] shorted between rear speaker LH signal (+)
cuit.
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER GND-SHORT Sound signal rear speaker RH circuit to Check sound signal rear speaker RH cir-
[U126A] ground is shorted. cuit.
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER VB-SHORT [U126B]
RR-SURROUND SP OPEN [U126C] Sound signal woofer RH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
RR-SURROUND SP SHORT [U126D] between woofer RH signal (+) and woofer Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
RH signal (-).
RR-SURROUND SP GND-SHORT Sound signal woofer RH circuit to ground is
Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
[U126E] shorted.
RR-SURROUND SP VB-SHORT [U126F] Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
shorted.
RL-SURROUND SP OPEN [U1274] Sound signal woofer LH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
RL-SURROUND SP SHORT [U1275] between woofer LH signal (+) and woofer Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
LH signal (-).
AV-212
A
RL-SURROUND SP GND-SHORT [U1276] Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
shorted.
RL-SURROUND SP VB-SHORT [U1277] Check sound signal woofer LH circuit. B
shorted.
RL-SP/FL-WOOFER OPEN [U1278] Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
open.
Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit is C
RL-SP/FL-WOOFER SHORT [U1279] shorted between rear speaker LH signal (+) Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
RL-SP/FL-WOOFER GND-SHORT Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit to D
Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
[U127A] ground is shorted.
RL-SP/FL-WOOFER VB-SHORT [U127B] Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
tery is shorted. E
FL-DOOR SP OPEN [U127C]
open. cuit.
Sound signal front speaker LH circuit is F
FL-DOOR SP SHORT [U127D] shorted between front speaker LH signal
cuit.
FL-DOOR SP GND-SHORT [U127E] G
FL-DOOR SP VB-SHORT [U127F]
H
FR-TWEETER OPEN [U1294]
open. cuit.
Sound signal front squawker RH circuit is
FR-TWEETER SHORT [U1295] shorted between front squawker RH signal
Check sound signal front squawker RH cir- I
cuit.
FR-TWEETER GND-SHORT [U1296] J
FR-TWEETER VB-SHORT [U1297]
Sound signal front squawker LH circuit is Check sound signal front squawker LH cir- K
FL-TWEETER OPEN [U1298]
open. cuit.
FL-TWEETER SHORT [U1299] shorted between front squawker LH signal L
cuit.
FL-TWEETER GND-SHORT [U129A]
ground is shorted. cuit. M
FL-TWEETER VB-SHORT [U129B]
When either one of the following items is AV
detected:
• Multifunction switch power supply and • Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between AV refer to AV-237, "MULTIFUNCTION O
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch
control unit and multifunction switch is P
malfunctioning.
AV-213
detected:
BOSE amp. power supply and ground cir-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] cuits
• AMP CONN [U124E] Refer to AV-238, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis
Procedure".
control unit and BOSE amp. is malfunc-
tioning.
detected:
• DVD player power supply and ground cir- • DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits are malfunctioning. cuits
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between Refer to AV-239, "DVD PLAYER : Diag-
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] BOSE amp. and DVD player are mal- nosis Procedure"
functioning. • AV communication circuits between
• AV communication signal between AV BOSE amp. and DVD player
tioning.
detected:
Camera control unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits
• AMP CONN [U1252] Refer to AV-239, "CAMERA CONTROL
control unit and Camera control unit is
malfunctioning.
detected:
• AV communication circuits between cam-
era control unit and BOSE amp. are mal- AV communication circuits between cam-
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248]
functioning. era control unit and BOSE amp.
• AMP CONN [U124E]
tioning.
detected:
tifunction switch and rear control switch
control switch and camera control unit
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] cation circuits between camera control
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] unit and NAVI control unit.
• AMP CONN [U124E] Without rear control switch
• REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] When either one of the following items is
detected:
function switch and camera control unit
detected:
• SWITCH CONN [U1240]
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248]
• REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252]
malfunctioning.
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
AV-214
A
Display Item Display Vehicle status Remarks

On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) B
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal.
PKB SIG C
Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light
switch is ON .
D
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor
Off to light when the light switch is OFF —
or ON. E
On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position
F
On Selector lever in R position
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
Off normal.
than R
G
SELECTION FROM MENU
selected vehicle signals. H
Item to be selected Description

VHCL SPD SIG I
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS”
ILLUM SIG
is selected. J
IGN SIG
REV SIG
K
AV
AV-215
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT-III
onds or more.

AV-216
A


SULT-III D

>> INSPECTION END

G
AV
AV-217

• It is connected to ECM and combination meter. via CAN communication to ob-
AV CONTROL UNIT
unit.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
[U1310] detected.
AV-218
A

• It is connected to ECM and combination meter. via CAN communication to ob- D
AV CONTROL UNIT
• Composite image signal (AUX and DVD images) is input from DVD player. E
unit.
• Sound signal (DVD and AUX sounds) is input from the DVD player. F

G
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

H
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
Cont Unit
I
[U1200]
AV
AV-219

AV CONTROL UNIT
unit.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
[U1216] detected.
AV-220
U1231 BOSE AMP.
U1231 BOSE AMP.
A
Replace the BOSE amp. if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-386, "Removal and Installation". B

Inputs sound signal from AV control unit and DVD player, and outputs sound sig- C
BOSE AMP.

D
Display contents of
CONSULT-III E
AMP TEMP
U1231 Internal malfunction of BOSE amp. is detected. Replace BOSE amp.
[U1231]
AV
AV-221
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

and operates.
DISPLAY UNIT
chronizing).
trol unit.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
FRONT DISP CONN
[U1243]

YES >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
11 56
M49 M129 Existed
22 44
Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M49 Not existed
22
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV-222
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL A

B
(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value C
Connector Terminal

M49 11 Ground
ness.
E
PKIB5039J
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
G
H
(+)
I
Connector Terminal
J
M49 22 Ground
ness.
K
PKIB5039J
Is inspection result normal? L

M
AV
AV-223

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CAMERA CONT. CONN Malfunction is detected in camera connection recogni- Camera connection recognition sig-
U1250


Continuity
M130 68 B251 14 Existed
AV control unit
Continuity
M130 68 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and camera control unit connector.
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Connected camera
0V
M130 68 Ground
Disconnect camera
5V
AV-224
A
AV
AV-225
U1260, U1261, U1262, U1263 CENTER SPEAKER

CENTER SPEAKER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CENTER SP OPEN Check sound signal center speaker
U1260 Sound signal center speaker circuit is open.
[U1260] circuit.
CENTER SP SHORT Sound signal center speaker circuit is shorted between Check sound signal center speaker
U1261
[U1261] center speaker signal (+) and center speaker signal (-). circuit.
CENTER SP GND- Check sound signal center speaker
U1262 Sound signal center speaker circuit to ground is shorted.
SHORT [U1262] circuit.
CENTER SP VB- Check sound signal center speaker
U1263 Sound signal center speaker circuit to battery is shorted.
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

1. Delete the self-diagnosis results. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. perform the self-diagnosis again.
3. Check that the DTC is detected again.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Repair sound signal center speaker circuit harness or connector.
AV-226
U1264, U1265, U1266, U1267 FRONT RIGHT DOOR SPEAKER
A
B
FRONT RIGHT DOOR SPEAKER
C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes E
CONSULT-III
FR-DOOR SP OPEN Check sound signal front speaker RH
U1264 Sound signal front speaker RH circuit is open.
[U1264] circuit.
Sound signal front speaker RH circuit is shorted between F
FR-DOOR SP SHORT Check sound signal front speaker RH
U1265 front speaker RH signal (+) and front speaker RH signal (-
[U1265] circuit.
).
U1266
FR-DOOR SP GND- Sound signal front speaker RH circuit to ground is short- Check sound signal front speaker RH G
SHORT [U1266] ed. circuit.
FR-DOOR SP VB- Sound signal front speaker RH circuit to battery is short- Check sound signal front speaker RH
U1267
SHORT [U1267] ed. circuit. H
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS I

3. Check that the DTC is detected again. J
YES >> Repair sound signal front speaker RH circuit harness or connector.
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". K
AV
AV-227
U1268, U1269, U126A, U126B REAR RIGHT DOOR SPEAKER

REAR RIGHT DOOR SPEAKER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER Check sound signal rear speaker LH
U1268 Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit is open.
OPEN [U1268] circuit.
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit is shorted between Check sound signal rear speaker LH
U1269
SHORT [U1269] rear speaker LH signal (+) and rear speaker LH signal (-). circuit.
U126A Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit to ground is shorted.
GND- SHORT [U126A] circuit.
U126B Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit to battery is shorted.
VB-SHORT [U126B] circuit.

YES >> Repair sound signal rear speaker RH circuit harness or connector.
AV-228
U126C, U126D, U126E, U126F REAR RIGHT SQUAWKER/ RIGHT WOOFER
U126C, U126D, U126E, U126F REAR RIGHT SQUAWKER/ RIGHT WOOF-
A
ER
B

• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. C
REAR RIGHT SQUAWKER
RIGHT WOOFER
• Outputs low frequency sound. D
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes F
CONSULT-III
RR-SURROUND SP Check sound signal woofer RH cir-
U126C Sound signal woofer RH circuit is open.
OPEN [U126C] cuit.
G
RR-SURROUND SP Sound signal woofer RH circuit is shorted between woofer Check sound signal woofer RH cir-
U126D
SHORT [U12D1] RH signal (+) and woofer RH signal (-). cuit.
U126E
GND- SHORT [U126E]
Sound signal woofer RH circuit to ground is shorted.
cuit.
H

U126F Sound signal woofer RH circuit to battery is shorted.
VB-SHORT [U126F] cuit.
I
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS J

3. Check that the DTC is detected again. K
YES >> Repair sound signal woofer RH circuit harness or connector.
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". L
AV
AV-229
U1274, U1275, U1276, U1277 REAR LEFT SQUAWKER/LEFT WOOFER

REAR RIGHT SQUAWKER
RIGHT WOOFER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
RL-SURROUND SP
U1274 Sound signal woofer LH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
OPEN [U1274]
RL-SURROUND SP Sound signal woofer LH circuit is shorted between woofer
U1275 Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
SHORT [U1275] LH signal (+) and woofer LH signal (-).
RL-SURROUND SP
U1276 Sound signal woofer LH circuit to ground is shorted. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
GND- SHORT [U1276]
RL-SURROUND SP
U1277 Sound signal woofer LH circuit to battery is shorted. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
VB-SHORT [U1277]

YES >> Repair sound signal woofer LH circuit harness or connector.
AV-230
U1278, U1279, U127A, U127B REAR LEFT DOOR SPEAKER
A
B
REAR LEFT DOOR SPEAKER
C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
RL- SP/FL-WOOFER Check sound signal rear speaker LH
RL- SP/FL-WOOFER Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit is shorted between Check sound signal rear speaker LH F
U1279
GND- SHORT [U127A] circuit. G
H

J
YES >> Repair sound signal rear speaker LH circuit harness or connector.
K
AV
AV-231
U127C, U127D, U127E, U127F FRONT LEFT DOOR SPEAKER

FRONT LEFT DOOR SPEAKER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
FL- DOOR SP OPEN Check sound signal front speaker LH
U127C Sound signal front speaker LH circuit is open.
[U127C] circuit.
FL- DOOR SP SHORT Sound signal front speaker LH circuit is shorted between Check sound signal front speaker LH
U127D
[U127D] front speaker LH signal (+) and front speaker LH signal (-). circuit.
FL- DOOR SP GND- Check sound signal front speaker LH
U127E Sound signal front speaker LH circuit to ground is shorted.
SHORT [U127E] circuit.
FL- DOOR SP VB- Check sound signal front speaker LH
U127F Sound signal front speaker LH circuit to battery is shorted.
SHORT [U127F] circuit.

YES >> Repair sound signal front speaker LH circuit harness or connector.
AV-232
U1294, U1295, U1296, U1297 FRONT RIGHT SQUAWKER
A
B
FRONT RIGHT SQUAWKER
C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
FR-TWEETER OPEN Check sound signal front squawker
U1294 Sound signal front squawker RH circuit is open.
[U1294] RH circuit.
Sound signal front squawker RH circuit is shorted be- F
FR-TWEETER SHORT Check sound signal front squawker
U1295 tween front squawker RH signal (+) and front squawker
[U1295] RH circuit.
RH signal (-).
U1296
FR-TWEETER GND- Sound signal front squawker RH circuit to ground is short- Check sound signal front squawker G
SHORT [U1296] ed. RH circuit.
FR-TWEETER VB- Sound signal front squawker RH circuit to battery is short- Check sound signal front squawker
U1297
SHORT [U1297] ed. RH circuit. H

YES >> Repair sound signal front squawker RH circuit harness or connector.
AV
AV-233
U1298, U1299, U129A, U129B FRONT LEFT SQUAWKER

FRONT LEFT SQUAWKER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
U1298 Sound signal front squawker LH circuit is open.
[U1298] LH circuit.
Sound signal front squawker LH circuit is shorted between
U1299 front squawker LH signal (+) and front squawker LH signal
[U1299] LH circuit.
(-).
FR-TWEETER GND- Sound signal front squawker LH circuit to ground is short- Check sound signal front squawker
U129A
SHORT [U129A] ed. LH circuit.
FR-TWEETER VB- Sound signal front squawker LH circuit to battery is short- Check sound signal front squawker
U129B
SHORT [U129B] ed. LH circuit.

YES >> Repair sound signal front squawker LH circuit harness or connector.
AV-234
A
U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta- B
Self-diagnosis results display item C

DTC Description
CONSULT-III take
D
• Multifunction switch power supply
• multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Refer to AV-237, "MULTIFUNC-
are malfunctioning. E
U1300 [U1300] TION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit and
U1240 • SWITCH CONN dure".
multifunction switch are malfunctioning.
[U1240] • AV communication circuits be-
tween AV control unit and multi-
multifunction switch is malfunctioning. F
function switch.
• DVD player power supply and ground circuits are mal-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
functioning.
Refer to AV-239, "DVD PLAYER :
G
• AV communication circuits between BOSE amp. and
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN Diagnosis Procedure".
DVD player are malfunctioning.
tween BOSE amp. and DVD player. H
DVD player is malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuits are mal-
U1300 circuits.
[U1300] functioning. I
U124E Refer to AV-238, "BOSE AMP. : Diag-
• AMP CONN [U124E] • AV communication signal between AV control unit and
nosis Procedure".
BOSE amp. is malfunctioned.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Camera control unit power supply J
U1300 [U1300] Camera control unit power supply and ground circuits are and ground circuits.
U1252 • REAR-CAMERA LAN malfunctioning. Refer to AV-239, "CAMERA CON-
CONN [U1252] TROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure"
• AV COMM CIRCUIT When either one of the following items is detected: K
U1300 [U1300] • AV communication circuits between NAVI control unit
AV communication circuits between
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN and BOSE amp. are malfunctioning.
NAVI control unit and BOSE amp.
U124E [U1248] • AV communication signal between NAVI control unit
L
• AMP CONN [U124E] and BOSE amp. is malfunctioning.
With rear control switch • AV communication circuits be-
When either one of the following items is detected: tween multifunction switch and rear
• malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits control switch. M
• AV COMM CIRCUIT between rear control switch and camera control unit. • AV communication circuits be-
[U1300] • malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits tween rear control switch and cam-
U1300
• DVD DECK CONN between camera control unit and BOSE amp. era control unit.
U1248 AV
[U1248]
U124E Without rear control switch
U1252 When either one of the following items is detected:
• REAR-CAMERA LAN AV communication circuits between
CONN [U1252] • malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits
multifunction switch and camera con-
between multifunction switch and camera control unit. O
trol unit.
• malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits
between camera control unit and BOSE amp.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT P
[U1300]
U1300 • SWITCH CONN When either one of the following items is detected:
U1240 [U1240] • AV communication circuits between AV control unit and AV communication circuits between
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN multifunction switch are malfunctioning. AV control unit and multifunction
U124E [U1248] • AV communication signal between AV control unit and switch.
U1252 • AMP CONN [U124E] multifunction switch is malfunctioning.
• REAR-CAMERA LAN
CONN [U1252]
AV-235
AV CONTROL UNIT
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 31
YES >> GO TO 2.
M127
YES >> GO TO 3.
M127 20
Ground OFF Existed
M131 85
DISPLAY UNIT
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (DISPLAY SIDE)

Inverter VCC 2
M49 ACC 9V
Signal VCC 3
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
AV-236
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect the harness connector between display unit and AV control unit.
B
Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No.
C
2 59
Ground M49 M129 Existed
3 47
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground. D
Display unit
Connector No. Terminal No. E
Ground
Inverter VCC 2
M49 Not existed
Signal VCC 3
F
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (AV CONTROL UNIT SIDE)
1. Connect the AV control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ACC. H
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Voltage (Approx.) I
Inverter VCC 59
M129 ACC 9V
Signal VCC 47
J
K
2. Disconnect display unit connector. L
Display unit
Signal name Continuity M
Connector No. Terminal No. Ground
Ground M49 1 Existed
Is inspection result normal? AV
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH O
P
1.CHECK FUSE

AV-237
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003901182
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 32, 33
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
10
Battery power supply B224 OFF
11 Battery voltage
ACC power supply B225 20 ACC
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between BOSE amp. and fuse.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
AV-238
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Continuity A
7
Ground B224 OFF Existed
12
B
C
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003901183
D
1.CHECK FUSE
E
Battery 31
F
YES >> GO TO 2. G
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
H
I
Is inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between camera control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT K
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and ground. L
Ground B251 31 OFF Existed M
AV
DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003901184 O
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses. P

Battery 31
AV-239
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between DVD player harness connectors and ground.
M254 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between DVD player and fuse.
2. Disconnect DVD player connectors.
3. Check continuity between DVD player harness connectors and ground.
AV-240
A
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C

3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Continuity E
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and ground. F
Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground G
M49 17 Not existed
Is inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL I
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector terminal and ground using an oscilloscope. J
(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal
L
M49 17 Ground
by selecting “Color Spectrum Bar” M
SKIB2238J
AV
NO >> Replace AV control unit. O
AV-241
UNIT)


Continuity
Display unit
Continuity
M49 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal

M49 6 Ground
SKIB2236J

AV-242
A
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit or NAVI control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
Display unit
Continuity
M49 18 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL I
(+)
Connector Terminal
L
M49 18 Ground
SKIB2237J
AV
AV-243
UNIT)
PLAY UNIT)


Continuity
Display unit
Continuity
M49 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 19 Ground —
SKIB3603E

AV-244
A
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit or NAVI control unit with RGB area (YS) B
C
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. D
Display unit AV control unit E

Continuity
F
Display unit G
Continuity
M49 9 Not existed
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
I
(+) K
Connector Terminal
L
M
M49 9 Ground
AV
PKIB4948J

P
AV-245


Continuity
Display unit
Continuity
M49 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 8 Ground —
SKIB3601E

AV-246
A

E
Continuity

G
Display unit
Continuity
M49 20 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.

K
(+)
M
M49 20 Ground —
AV
SKIB3598E

O
P
AV-247
Transmits the image signal of external device from auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and DVD player connector.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and DVD player harness connector.
Auxiliary input jacks DVD player

Continuity
7 8
M253 M254 Existed
8 10
Auxiliary input jacks

Continuity
M253 7 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and DVD player connector.
(+) (−)
SKIB2251J

YES >> Replace DVD player.
AV-248
A
The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT C

3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Continuity E
M125 14 M131 103 Existed
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground. F
Continuity
M125 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE I
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground. J
(+)
AV control unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal
M131 103 Ground L
YES >> Replace preset switch. M
AV
AV-249
control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connec-
tor.
Camera control unit Rear view camera

Continuity
Camera control unit

Continuity
B251 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA ON SIGNAL
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Selector le-
tion.
B251 8 Ground Other than
selector le-
0V
ver in R posi-
tion.
AV-250
A
control unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT D

3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. E

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals F
11 64
B251 M130 Existed
12 65
G
Camera control unit H

Continuity
B251 12 Not existed
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
(+) L
Connector Terminal
M
B251 12 Ground
When rear view camera AV
image is displayed.
SKIB2251J
O

YES >> Replace AV control unit. P
AV-251
AV control unit that inputs the camera image signal and AUX image signal transmits the composite image sig-
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
AV control unit Display unit

Continuity
36 15
M129 M49 Existed
37 5
AV control unit
Continuity
M129 36 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
(+) (−)
Connector Terminal
Ground
M129 36
played.
SKIB2251J

AV-252
A
• Steering angle sensor signal 1, 2 detects the turning direction and quantity of the steering and transmits it to B
trol unit.
• Camera control unit performs the correction of neutral position with sensor signal 1, 2, 3 and vehicle speed C
signal.
D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
nector.
F
Continuity
G
23 3
25 8 H
I
Camera control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
23 Ground J
B251 24 Not existed
25
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
2. Turn ignition switch ON. M
(+) AV
Voltage
Camera control unit
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminals
O
23
25 P
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV-253
(+)
Connector Terminals
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
23, 24 Ground
B251 Turn the steering to the left
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2

25 Ground
neutral position
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
AV-254
A
Transmits the steering switch signal to AV control unit. B

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT C

3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and spiral cable harness connector. D

Continuity E
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground. F
AV control unit
Continuity
M127 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE I
Check spiral cable.
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE K
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector. L
(+) (−)
Voltage
AV control unit AV control unit M
(Approx.)
M127 6 M127 15 3.3 V
AV
YES >> GO TO 4.
O
2. Check steering switch. Refer to AV-256, "Component Inspection". P
AV-255

JSNIA0215GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
MENU DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
M303 M303 17
SOURCE switch ON 1
15
VOL DOWN switch ON 1
AV-256
A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
AV control unit
Continuity
M127 16 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M127 16 M127 15 3.3 V
AV
YES >> GO TO 4.
O
AV-257

JSNIA0215GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
MENU DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
M303 M303 17
SOURCE switch ON 1
15
AV-258
A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
4. Connect AV control unit connector. F
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
H
YES >> GO TO 3.
I
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground. J
AV control unit
Continuity K
M127 15 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH M
AV
AV-259

JSNIA0215GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
MENU DOWN switch
315 – 327
ON
14
M303 M303 17
SOURCE switch ON 1
15
AV-260
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
AV CONTROL UNIT
B

CONSULT-III data monitor item C
Dis-
play
On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor- D
VHCL SPD SIG

PKB SIG E
On Light switch ON.

ILLUM SIG —
Off Light switch OFF. F
IGN SIG —
On Selector lever in R position. G
Off mal.
than R.
H
TERMINAL LAYOUT
K
JPNIA1093ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
L
Terminal
Description
Condition M
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Keep pressing SOURCE AV
0V
switch.
Ignition
(W/G) (L/B)
ON
Keep pressing switch. 1.3 V O
Ignition
7 P
(V/W)
ACC
Ignition Lighting switch is OFF. 0V
9
OFF
AV-261
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(L/B) ground
ON
0V
switch.
Ignition
16 15
Steering switch signal B Input switch Keep pressing VOL UP
(GR/L) (L/B) 0.7 V
ON switch.
Ignition
19
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
20
(B/W)
ON
Ignition
ACC
Ignition When camera image, DVD

36
Ground Composite image signal Output switch image or AUX image is dis-
(B)
ON played.
SKIB2251J
Ignition
(W) ground
ON
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
AV-262
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
40 play color bar by selecting C
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J D
E
Ignition
41
(G)
ON
F
SKIB3603E
RGB synchronizing signal

42 — — — — — G
shield
5.0 V
played.
H
Ignition
43
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch When camera image, DVD
(B) I
played.
J
PKIB4948J
K
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
L
PKIB5039J
Ignition
Ground Input switch — AV
(W) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E
O
Ignition
46
Ground Signal ground — switch — —
(LG)
ACC
P
Ignition
47
Ground Signal VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(O)
ACC
49 — Shield — — — —
50 — RGB signal Shield — — — —
55 — Shield — — — —
AV-263
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
(R) signal
ON
SKIB3598E
Ignition
58
Ground Inverter ground — switch — —
(BR)
ACC
Ignition
59
Ground Inverter VCC Output switch — 9.0 V
(Y)
ACC
Camera image signal
64 — — — — —
shield
Ignition
(Y) played.
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
66 Composite (DVD and AUX) When DVD image or AUX
Ground Input switch
(V) image signal image is displayed.
ON
SKIB2251J

Ignition 0V
Ground Input switch
ON 5.0 V
73 — — — — —
shield
Ignition
74 Composite (DVD and AUX)
(G) image signal ground
ON
AV-264
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
83 82 Stereo (DVD and AUX)
Input switch DVD* and AUX sound out- C
(R) (W) sound signal RH put.
ON
SKIB3609E D
Ignition
85
(B/W)
ON E
86 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
87 Input/ F
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
— — — —
(W) (H) Output G
— — — —
(B) (L) Output
90
—
AV communication signal Input/
— — —
H
(L) (H) Output
— — — —
(R) (L) Output I
Ignition J
99 98 Stereo (DVD and AUX)
(B) (G) sound signal LH
Input switch DVD*or AUX sound output.
ON
K
SKIB3609E
100 — Shield — — — —
Ignition L
101
Ground Switch ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
103
Ignition Pressing the eject switch. 0V M
ON
Ignition AV
104
(O)
ON

105 O
(P/B) 0V
ON R position.
AV-265
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Parking brake ON. 0V
Ignition
106
(G/R) Parking brake OFF.
ON
JSNIA0007GB
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
JSNIA0012GB
Ignition
109 115 Stereo sound signal front
Output switch Audio output
(W) (B) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
111 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
113 119
Stereo sound signal LH Output switch Audio output
(W) (B)
ON
SKIB3609E
*:Stereo sounds are input only when the 2 channel stereo sound is played.
AV-266
AV CONTROL UNIT
Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM — INFOID:0000000003971961
AV
P
JCNWM0917GB
AV-267
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0918GB
AV-268
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0919GB
AV-269
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0920GB
AV-270
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0921GB
AV-271
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0922GB
AV-272
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0923GB
AV-273
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0924GB
AV-274
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0925GB
AV-275
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0926GB
AV-276
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0927GB
AV-277
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0928GB
AV-278
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0929GB
AV-279
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0930GB
AV-280
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0931GB
AV-281
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0932GB
AV-282
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0933GB
AV-283
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0934GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-284
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Display item Refer to A

B

U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-220, "DTC Logic" C
U1231 AMP TEMP [U1231] AV-221, "DTC Logic"
U1250 CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] AV-224, "Diagnosis Procedure" D
U1260 CENTER SP OPEN [U1260] AV-226, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1261 CENTER SP SHORT [U1261] AV-226, "Diagnosis Procedure"
E
U1262 CENTER SP GND-SHORT [U1262] AV-226, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1263 CENTER SP VB-SHORT [U1263] AV-226, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1264 FR-DOOR SP OPEN [U1264] AV-227, "Diagnosis Procedure" F
U1265 FR-DOOR SP SHORT [U1265] AV-227, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1266 FR-DOOR SP GND-SHORT [U1266] AV-227, "Diagnosis Procedure"
G
U1267 FR-DOOR SP VB-SHORT [U1267] AV-227, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1268 RR-SP/FR-WOOFER OPEN [U1268] AV-228, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1269 RR-SP/FR-WOOFER SHORT [U1269] AV-228, "Diagnosis Procedure" H
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER GND-SHORT
U126A AV-228, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[U126A]
U126B RR-SP/FR-WOOFER VB-SHORT [U126B] AV-228, "Diagnosis Procedure" I
U126C RR-SURROUND SP OPEN [U126C] AV-229, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U126D RR-SURROUND SP SHORT [U126D] AV-229, "Diagnosis Procedure"
J
U126E RR-SURROUND SP GND-SHORT [U126E] AV-229, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U126F RR-SURROUND SP VB-SHORT [U126F] AV-229, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1274 RL-SURROUND SP OPEN [U1274] AV-230, "Diagnosis Procedure" K
U1275 RL-SURROUND SP SHORT [U1275] AV-230, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1276 RL-SURROUND SP GND-SHORT [U1276] AV-230, "Diagnosis Procedure"
L
U1277 RL-SURROUND SP VB-SHORT [U1277] AV-230, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1278 RL-SP/FL-WOOFER OPEN [U1278] AV-231, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1279 RL-SP/FL-WOOFER SHORT [U1279] AV-231, "Diagnosis Procedure" M
U127A RL-SP/FL-WOOFER GND-SHORT [U127A] AV-231, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U127B RL-SP/FL-WOOFER VB-SHORT [U127B] AV-231, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U127C FL-DOOR SP OPEN [U127C] AV-232, "Diagnosis Procedure" AV
U127D FL-DOOR SP SHORT [U127D] AV-232, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U127E] FL-DOOR SP GND-SHORT [U127E] AV-232, "Diagnosis Procedure"
O
U127F FL-DOOR SP VB-SHORT [U127F] AV-232, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1294 FR-TWEETER OPEN [U1294] AV-233, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1295 FR-TWEETER SHORT [U1295] AV-233, "Diagnosis Procedure" P
U1296 FR-TWEETER GND-SHORT [U1296] AV-233, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1297 FR-TWEETER VB-SHORT [U1297] AV-233, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1298 FL-TWEETER OPEN [U1298] AV-234, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1299 FL-TWEETER SHORT [U1299] AV-234, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U129A FL-TWEETER GND-SHORT [U129A] AV-234, "Diagnosis Procedure"
AV-285
AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Display item Refer to
U129B FL-TWEETER VB-SHORT [U129B] AV-234, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1252 • REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252]
AV-286
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JPNIA0006ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V H
(B/W)
ON
ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(Y) I
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9.0 V
(O) J
ACC
4 — — — — —
shield
Ignition K
(W) ground
ON
L
Ignition
Ground Input switch M
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J AV
7 — RGB ground — — — —
Ignition
(W) (HP) signal P
ON
SKIB3601E
AV-287
DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
5.0 V
played.
Ignition
9
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch When camera image, DVD
(B)
played.
PKIB4948J
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
13
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
Ignition
14
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON
Ignition When rear view camera im-

15
Ground Composite image signal Input switch age, DVD image or AUX
(B)
ON image is displayed.
SKIB2251J
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J
Ignition
18 play color bar by
ON
SIS screen.
SKIB2237J
AV-288
DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
19 C
(G)
ON
SKIB3603E D
E
Ignition
(R) signal
ON
F
SKIB3598E
21 — RGB synchronizing ground — — — —

G
Ignition H
ON
I
PKIB5039J
23 — Shield — — — —
J
AV
AV-289
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0917GB
AV-290
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0918GB
AV-291
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0919GB
AV-292
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0920GB
AV-293
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0921GB
AV-294
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0922GB
AV-295
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0923GB
AV-296
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0924GB
AV-297
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0925GB
AV-298
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0926GB
AV-299
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0927GB
AV-300
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0928GB
AV-301
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0929GB
AV-302
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0930GB
AV-303
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0931GB
AV-304
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0932GB
AV-305
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0933GB
AV-306
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0934GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-307
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA1094ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1 2 Sound signal front squawk-
(LG) (V) er LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(P) (L) er RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
5 6
Sound signal woofer RH Output switch Audio output
(Y) (BR)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
7
(B)
ON
Ignition
10
(SB)
OFF
Ignition
11
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
(B)
ON
AV-308
BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
13 8 C
Sound signal woofer LH Output switch Audio output
(R) (BR)
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
14 9 Sound signal rear speaker
(L) (O) RH
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
18 19 Sound signal front speaker
(W) (B) LH
ON
H
SKIB3609E
I
Ignition
20
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — 12.0 V
(V)
ACC
J
Ignition
24 23 Stereo sound signal front K
Input switch Audio output
(B) (W) LH
ON
L
SKIB3609E
M
Ignition
(W/R) (B/R) RH
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Output switch Audio output P
(G) (R) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
AV-309
BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
29 30 Sound signal center speak-
(V) (P) er
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(BR) (Y) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
33 34 Surround sound signal rear
(W/L) (GR/V) RH
Input switch When DVD is playing.*
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(W/L) (W/R) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
52 51 Surround sound signal front
(B) (W) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(Y) (BR) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
AV-310
BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
56 55 When inputting voice guid- C
Voice guidance signal Input switch
(W/L) (W/R) ance.
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
58 57 Surround sound signal cen-
(W/R) (B/R) ter
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(GR/V) (W/L) ter
ON
H
SKIB3609E
I
75 AV communication signal
— — — — —
(P) (L)
— — — — — J
(P) (L)
— — — — —
(L) (H)
K
— — — — —
(L) (H)
79 — Shield — — — —
L
*: All surround sounds are input only when the 5.1 channel surround sound is played.
AV
AV-311
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0917GB
AV-312
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0918GB
AV-313
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0919GB
AV-314
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0920GB
AV-315
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0921GB
AV-316
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0922GB
AV-317
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0923GB
AV-318
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0924GB
AV-319
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0925GB
AV-320
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0926GB
AV-321
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0927GB
AV-322
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0928GB
AV-323
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0929GB
AV-324
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0930GB
AV-325
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0931GB
AV-326
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0932GB
AV-327
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0933GB
AV-328
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0934GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-329
DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
TERMINAL LAYOUT
PHYSICAL VALUES
JPNIA1095ZZ
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B/W)
ON
Ignition
2
(Y)
OFF
3
OFF
Ignition
4
(V/W)
ACC
5 — Shield — — — —
6 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
(G) signal played.
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
ON
Ignition
10 Composite image (AUX)
(V) signal ground
ON
AV-330
DVD PLAYER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
13 11 C
AUX sound signal LH Input switch AUX sound output.
(B) (G)
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
14 12
AUX sound signal RH Input switch AUX sound output.
(W) (R)
ON
F
SKIB3609E
15 — AUX sound signal shield — — — —

G
Stereo (DVD and AUX Ignition H

21 22
sound) sound signal LH Output switch DVD*1 or AUX sound out-
(B) (G) put.
ON
I
SKIB3609E
J
Stereo (DVD and AUX Ignition
23 24
sound) sound signal RH Output switch DVD*1 or AUX sound out-
(R) (W) put.
ON
K
SKIB3609E
25 — Stereo sound signal shield — — — — L

— — — —
(R) (L) Output
30 AV communication signal Input/ M
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
— — — —
(P) (L) Output AV
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
34 — Shield — — — — O
Ignition
P
36 35 Surround sound signal front *2
Output switch DVD sound output.
(W) (B) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
AV-331
DVD PLAYER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(W) (B) LH
Output switch DVD sound output.*2
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(W) (B) ter
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
42 41 Surround sound signal
(L) (R) woofer
ON
SKIB3609E
43 — Shield — — — —
44 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(W) (B) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(W) (B) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
• *1: Stereo sounds are input only when the 2 channel stereo sound is played.
• *2: All surround sounds are input only when the 5.1 channel surround sound is played.
AV-332
DVD PLAYER
AV
P
JCNWM0917GB
AV-333
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0918GB
AV-334
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0919GB
AV-335
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0920GB
AV-336
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0921GB
AV-337
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0922GB
AV-338
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0923GB
AV-339
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0924GB
AV-340
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0925GB
AV-341
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0926GB
AV-342
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0927GB
AV-343
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0928GB
AV-344
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0929GB
AV-345
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0930GB
AV-346
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0931GB
AV-347
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0932GB
AV-348
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0933GB
AV-349
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0934GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-350
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JPNIA0007ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
5 — Shield — — — —
H
Ignition
6 When rear view camera im- I
ON
SKIB2251J
J
Ignition
7
(W)
ON K
8
(R) 0V
ON R position. L
11 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(BR) age is displayed. AV
ON
SKIB2251J
O
Ignition 0V
ON 5.0 V P
— — — —
(L/G) (L) Output
— — — —
(L/R) (H) Output
— — — —
(P) (L) Output
AV-351
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
— — — —
(L) (H) Output

22
(W) 0V
ON R position.

right.
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
23
(G)
ON
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2

right.
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
24
(SB)
ON
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
Ignition
ON
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
AV-352
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
NOTE: B
(destination unit).
C
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
D
SKIA6649J
E
Ignition
30
(V)
ACC
F
Ignition
31
(B/R)
ON
Ignition G
32
(Y)
OFF
H
AV
AV-353
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0917GB
AV-354
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0918GB
AV-355
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0919GB
AV-356
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0920GB
AV-357
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0921GB
AV-358
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0922GB
AV-359
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0923GB
AV-360
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0924GB
AV-361
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0925GB
AV-362
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0926GB
AV-363
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0927GB
AV-364
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0928GB
AV-365
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0929GB
AV-366
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0930GB
AV-367
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0931GB
AV-368
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0932GB
AV-369
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0933GB
AV-370
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0934GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-371
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
RELATED TO VEHICLE INFORMATION

• All switches cannot be operated.
• “Multi AV” is displayed on system se- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
lection display when the CONSULT- Refer to AV-211, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
III is initialized.
• All switches cannot be operated AV control unit power supply and ground circuits mal-
• “Multi AV” is not displayed on system function.
Multifunction switch and preset selection screen when the CON- Refer to AV-236, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-
switch operation does not work. SULT-III is initialized. cedure".
ed Installation".
For preset switch, Refer to AV-389, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
Fuel economy display, vehicle set- III self-diagnosis result
ting operation is abnormal There is no malfunction in the self-diag- Ignition signal. Refer to AV-236, "AV CONTROL UNIT :
nosis results Diagnosis Procedure".

to take
It cannot be switched to rear view Refer to AV-211, "CONSULT-III Func-
sis result.
monitor even when the selector le- tion (MULTI AV)".
ver is in the reverse position. There is not malfunction in the CONSULT-III self-diag- Reverse signal circuit malfunction.(AV
cuit malfunction.
dure".
Camera image is not shown. DVD and AUX images are normal.
tion.
dure".
Possible route line is indicated ab- Steering angle sensor signal circuits.
The “Steer. Angle Sensor” is not turned ON at “Con-
normally when camera image is dis- Refer to AV-253, "Diagnosis Proce-
nection Confirmation” of “Camera Cont.”
played. dure".
circuit malfunction between AV con-
dure".
Camera image is rolling. AUX image is rolling
dure".
AV-372

tion.
• All RGB images are not shown. Refer to AV-236, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
B
• Composite images are not dis- dure".
played.(camera and DVD and AUX im- • Communication circuit malfunction between AV control
age) unit and display unit.
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. C
RGB image is not shown. • Camera image is normal. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
• DVD and AUX images are not dis- Refer to AV-211, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
D
played.
• “Multi AV” is not displayed on system tion. E
selection screen when the CONSULT- Refer to AV-236, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
• All RGB images are not shown. F
• Composite images are normal. (cam-
era and DVD and AUX image)
G
Color of RGB image is not H
proper. (All RGB image)
Screen looks yellowish. trol unit and display unit. I
Refer AV-243, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB screen is rolling. All RGB screen is rolling. control unit and display unit.
J
RELATED TO AUDIO
K
Refer to AV-249, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
• Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
No sound from all speakers. • BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuits malfunc-
tion. Refer to AV-238, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Proce-
M
dure".
• No sound from all speakers.
• It dose not change to "DVD" mode. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. AV
Sound is not heard only from the specific Refer to AV-211, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)"
places.
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal. Antenna amp. ON signal circuit. O

Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom P
Steering switch signal GND circuit. Refer to AV-259, "Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
Only specified switch cannot be operated Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-396, "Removal and Installation".
AV-373
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”
Steering switch signal A circuit. Refer to AV-255, "Diagnosis Procedure".
switches do not work.
Steering switch's “VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN” switches do not
Steering switch signal B circuit. Refer to AV-257, "Diagnosis Procedure".
work.
RELATED TO DVD

• Composite image signal circuit malfunc-
tion between AV control unit and display
unit.
Refer to AV-252, "Diagnosis Procedure"
• RGB area synchronizing (YS) signal cir-
cuit malfunction between AV control unit
and display unit.
Refer to AV-245, "Diagnosis Procedure"
DVD image is not displayed Displayed in black and nothing displayed.
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal cir-
and display unit.
• Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit
malfunction between AV control unit and
display unit.
DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits malfunction.
LED lump of DVD player is not turned on.
Refer to AV-239, "DVD PLAYER : Diagno-
It dose not change to "DVD" mode. sis Procedure".
LED lump of DVD player is not turned on. to AV-211, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI
AV)"

NOTE:

Displayed in black and nothing can be dis-
played
AUX image signal circuit malfunction between DVD play-
• DVD image is normal.
er and auxiliary input jacks.
• Menu image is normal.

work.
AV)".
AV-374
A
BASIC OPERATIONS B

The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display. C
No image is displayed. The system in the video mode. Push <DISC> to change the mode.
The display is turned off. Push <Day/Night> to turn on the display.
D
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
This is not a malfunction. E
F
RELATED TO AUDIO
interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction. G
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
NOTE: H
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incor-
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the red book Compact Disc I
Standard and may not play.

J
Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone K
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
temperature. L
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, M
the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in com-
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the AV
Check if the CD is protected by copyright. O
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD, or if it is a multi session disc, some
the music starts playing. time may be required before the music starts playing. P
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.
AV-375
when playing or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
NOTE:
the signal.
AV-376
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
connectors.
G
J
K
PKIA0306E
AV
O
PKIA0307E
AV-377
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [BOSE AUDIO WITHOUT NAVIGATION]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
AV CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1034ZZ

4. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV-378
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA1035ZZ
F
1. Display unit
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". H
I
INSTALLATION
J
AV
AV-379
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
JPNIA1036ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-30, "DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation" (driver side) or
3. Remove front door speaker.
INSTALLATION
AV-380
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA1037ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-36, "Removal and Installation". G
INSTALLATION H
AV
AV-381
FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
JPNIA1038ZZ
1. Front squawker
REMOVAL
1. Remove the speaker grille with squawker. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
nector.
3. Remove front squawker.
INSTALLATION
AV-382
REAR SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
A
D
JPNIA1040ZZ
E
1. Rear squawker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-43, "Removal and Installation". G
2. Remove rear squawker mounting screws.
3. Remove rear squawker.
INSTALLATION H
AV
AV-383
CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
JPNIA1039ZZ
1. Center speaker
REMOVAL
1. Remove center speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Remove center speaker mounting screws, lift up the center speaker and disconnect center speaker con-
nector.
3. Remove center speaker.
INSTALLATION
AV-384
WOOFER
WOOFER
A
D
JPNIA1041ZZ
E
1. Woofer

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-43, "Removal and Installation". G
2. Remove woofer mounting bolts, lift up the woofer and disconnect woofer connector.
3. Remove woofer.
INSTALLATION H
AV
AV-385
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
JPNIA1042ZZ
: Vehicle front
1. BOSE amp.
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk front finisher upper. Refer to INT-57, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove BOSE amp. mounting bolts, disconnect the BOSE amp. connector.
3. Remove BOSE amp.
INSTALLATION
AV-386
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
A
D
JPNIA1032ZZ
E
2. Antenna amp.
F
REMOVAL
G
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-387
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1043ZZ
1. Cluster lid D
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
3. Remove multifunction switch.
INSTALLATION
AV-388
PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA1044ZZ
H

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". J
K
1. Preset switch
A. Screw
B. Screw L
JPNIA1045ZZ AV
INSTALLATION
NOTE: O
P
AV-389
REAR CONTROL SWITCH
REAR CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1046ZZ

A. Clip
REMOVAL
3. Remove rear control switch.
INSTALLATION
AV-390
DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA1047ZZ
F
1. DVD player
REMOVAL
1. Remove grove box. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation" H
2. Remove DVD player mounting screw, disconnect the DVD player connector.
3. Remove DVD player.
I
INSTALLATION
J
AV
AV-391
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1048ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove console finisher. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
AV-392
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
A
D
JPNIA1049ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear wheelhouse finisher RH. Refer to INT-57, "Removal and Installation". G
INSTALLATION H

I
AV
AV-393
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1050ZZ
1. Rear view camera

2. Seal
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk lid finisher inner. Refer to INT-59, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove rear view camera.
INSTALLATION
Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera.
and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the
bumper.
SKIB3691E
AV-394
REAR VIEW CAMERA
that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the A
vehicle.
Selected pattern :7 B
Pressing “ENTER” enable the camera control unit to memory C
SKIB3689E
Up/Down adjustment range : −20 – 20 D
CAUTION:
Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data. E
F
tor.
AV
AV-395
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0135ZZ
1. Spiral cable
REMOVAL
3. Remove steering angle sensor.
INSTALLATION
AV-396
A
AV
P
JPNIA1054GB
AV-397
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSNIA0732GB

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-521, "DTC Index".
DETAILED FLOW
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
YES >> GO TO 2.
AV-398
tion (MULTI AV)". A
NOTE:
B
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-521, "DTC Index". D
>> GO TO 5.
E
Table". F
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR G
NOTE: H
3. Check that the symptom does not occur. I
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> INSPECTION END J
AV
AV-399
WITH REAR VIEW MONITOR

nal.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Spe-

INFOID:0000000003778342
When camera control unit is replaced, the center position of predicted course line shall be corrected.
quirement INFOID:0000000003778343

PREDICTED COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
INFOID:0000000003778344
Adjust the center position of the predicted course line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted.
>> GO TO 2.
2.DRIVING
>> END
AV-400
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
MULTI AV SYSTEM
B
I
JSNIA1297GB
NOTE:
The name MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH indicates the integration of PRESET SWITCH and MULTIFUNCTION J
SWITCH virtually.
K
System name System explanation L

NAVIGATION SYSTEM AV-410, "System Description"
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM AV-415, "System Description" M
• AV control unit displays the fuel consumption status while re- AV
combination meter.
transmitting/receiving for the vehicle settings function. O
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM Refer to the following “HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM”.
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Refer to the following “DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM”.
P
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM Refer to the following “TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM”.
AV-401
MULTI AV SYSTEM
• AV control unit is connected by CAN communication, and it receives data signal from ECM, combination
of display and display control and receives the response signal from display unit.
NOTE:
AV control unit can perform CONSULT-III self-operating function and on board self-diagnosis.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
• Hands-free communication can be operated by connecting using Bluetooth™ communication with cellular
phone.
• Operation is performed by display unit (touch panel), multifunction switch or steering switch, and operating
condition is indicated on display unit.
JSNIA1305GB
When a call is originated

Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (Mic. Signal) is input to NAVI control unit. NAVI control unit
outputs to cellular phone via TEL antenna with Bluetooth™ communication as a TEL voice signal. Voice sound
is then heard at the other party.
When receiving a call
Voice sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party. The cellular phone outputs the voice signal to
TEL antenna by establishing Bluetooth™ communication. The signal from TEL antenna is sent to front speaker
via NAVI control unit, AV control unit, and BOSE amp.
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
• DVD player is connected with AV control unit via AV communication, and controlled by AV control unit.
• DVD image signal is output from DVD player to display unit via AV control unit.
• DVD stereo (2ch) sound signal is output from DVD player to each speaker via AV control unit and BOSE
amp.
• DVD surround (5.1ch) sound signal is output from DVD player to each speaker via BOSE amp.
AV-402
MULTI AV SYSTEM
switch and rear control switch transmits operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication. A
JSNIA1299GB
AUXILIARY INPUT SYSTEM F

• Image and sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device with auxiliary input jacks.
switch and rear control switch transmits operation signal to AV control unit by AV communication. G
JSNIA1301GB
TOUCH PANEL SYSTEM L

Each operation of multi AV system can be performed by directly touching a display.
AV
O
JSNIA1308GB
AV-403
MULTI AV SYSTEM
JPNIA1059ZZ

7. Rear squawker LH 8. Woofer LH 9. NAVI control unit
10. BOSE amp. 11. Rear view camera 12. Woofer RH
AV-404
MULTI AV SYSTEM
13. Camera control unit 14. TEL antenna 15. Rear squawker RH
16. Antenna amp. 17. GPS antenna 18. Rear door speaker RH A
25. DVD player 26. Multifunction switch 27. Display unit B
28. Microphone
A. Trunk room upper LH B. Trunk room upper RH C. Trunk room side RH
D. Within rear pillar finisher RH E. Within rear pillar finisher RH F. Within rear parcel shelf finisher C
G. Spiral cable part H. In center console I. In grove box
Component Description INFOID:0000000003765830 D
Part name Description E

• AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function. F
G
• Composite image (DVD, AUX and camera images) signal is output to display H
unit.
• Map data can be read from the Map DVD-ROM by installing Map DVD-ROM.
• The NAVI control unit sends map data to the AV control unit. I
• The NAVI control unit includes the hands-free phone and navigation functions.
NAVI CONTROL UNIT • The NAVI control unit transmits navigation and hands-free phone related im-
ages to AV control unit. J
• It includes the TEL adapter and Bluetooth™ function.
Map DVD-ROM A collection of map data.
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. K
chronizing).
DISPLAY UNIT L
trol unit.
• Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching a display
directly.
M
Inputs sound signal from AV control unit and DVD player, and outputs sound sig-
BOSE AMP.
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. AV
WOOFER
FRONT SPEAKER
O
REAR SPEAKER
FRONT SQUAWKER P
REAR SQUAWKER
CENTER SPEAKER
AV-405
MULTI AV SYSTEM
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where camera, audio,
DVD and AUX input operations are integrated.
• Operation panel is equipped with the centralized switch where audio and air
conditioner operations are integrated.
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by wiring harness.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
REAR VIEW CAMERA
• Used for hands-free phone operation.
MICROPHONE • Mic. signal is transmitted to NAVI control unit
• Power (Mic. VCC) is supplied from NAVI control unit.
• Enables audio operations, etc.
STEERING SWITCH
It transmits the playback DVD image signal and DVD sound signal to the AV con-
DVD PLAYER
trol unit.
• The image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the DVD player and AV con-
trol unit to the display unit.
• The sound signal of the auxiliary input is output via the DVD player and AV con-
trol unit to the BOSE amp.
• The image signal of the auxiliary input is output via the AV control unit to the
display, and it outputs the sound signal to the AV control unit.
• Enables audio operations, etc.
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and transmitted to NAVI control unit.
TEL ANTENNA TEL voice signal is received and transmitted to NAVI control unit.
AV-406
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
A
JSNIA1310GB
NOTE: G
SWITCH virtually.
I
display unit.
Function
J
AM/FM radio
CD
K
Operating Signal
or steering switch.
switch.
Screen Display
AV
AM/FM Radio Mode
received.
• Sound signal is input to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker for AV control unit.
CD Mode
• AV control unit outputs sound signal to BOSE amp. and BOSE amp. outputs to woofer and each speaker
when CD is inserted to AV control unit.
AV-407
AUDIO SYSTEM
JPNIA1059ZZ

AV-408
AUDIO SYSTEM
16. Antenna amp. 17. GPS antenna 18. Rear door speaker RH A
25. DVD player 26. Multifunction switch 27. Display unit B
28. Microphone
D. Within rear pillar finisher RH E. Within rear pillar finisher RH F. Within rear parcel shelf finisher C
Component Description INFOID:0000000003765834 D
Part name Description E

• The AM/FM receiving function and the CD playing function are equipped.
AV CONTROL UNIT
• Sound signal is transmitted to BOSE amp.
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit. F
DISPLAY UNIT
• RGB image signal (audio operation condition) is input from AV control unit.
Inputs sound signal from AV control unit, and outputs sound signal to woofer and
BOSE AMP.
each speaker.
G
WOOFER
• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. H
FRONT SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKER
I
FRONT SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER J
CENTER SPEAKER
K
• Each audio operation can be operated. L
• The preset switch is connected via AV communication, and it transmits the op-
PRESET SWITCH
• The disk ejection operating signal is performed by hard-wire.
M
STEERING SWITCH
• Each audio operation can be operated. AV
ANTENNA AMP. trol unit. O
AV-409
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
JSNIA1311GB
DESCRIPTION
• The navigation system can be operated by display (touch panel), multifunction switch or steering switch.
Each operation signal is input to AV control unit. AV control unit communicates with NAVI control unit via AV
communication, and controls the navigation system.
• Guide sound during the operation of the navigation system is output from NAVI control unit to front speaker
through AV control unit and BOSE amp.
• NAVI control unit calculates the vehicle location based on the signals from GYRO (angle speed sensor),
vehicle sensor, and GPS satellite, as well as the map data from Map DVD-ROM. It transmits the map image
signal (RGB image, RGB area, and the synchronizing RGB image) to display through AV control unit.
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current
position according to the following three signals:
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed
sensor
• Turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope
(angular velocity sensor)
• Direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna
(GPS information)
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the
calculated vehicle position with map data read from the map DVD-
ROM, which is stored in the DVD-ROM drive (map-matching), and
JSNIA1417GB
indicated on the screen as a vehicle mark. More accurate data is
judged and used by comparing vehicle position detection results found by the GPS with the result by map-
matching.
AV-410
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-
tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its A
direction.
• Travel distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sen-
B
sor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect
as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance cor-
rection function has been adopted.
• Travel direction C
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyro-
scope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS informa-
SEL684V
tion). They have both advantages and disadvantages. D
Type Advantage Disadvantage

Gyroscope Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite Direction errors may accumulate when vehicle is E
(angular velocity sensor) accurately. driven for long distances without stopping.
GPS antenna Can detect the vehicle's travel direction Correct direction cannot be detected when vehicle
(GPS information) (North/South/East/West). speed is low.
F
More accurate traveling direction is detected because priorities are set for the signals from these two
devices according to the situation.
MAP-MATCHING G
Map-matching compares a current location detected by the method
in the “Location Detection Principle” with a road map data from Map
DVD-ROM stored in DVD-ROM drive. H
NOTE:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map DVD-ROM.
I
J
SEL685V
The vehicle position may not be corrected under the following circumstances and after driving for a certain K
time when GPS information is difficult to receive. In this case, the vehicle mark on the display must be cor-
rected manually.
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be L
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is cur-
rently driven has been judged and the vehicle mark has been repo-
sitioned.
Alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and M
the incorrect road can be avoided if there is an error in distance
and/or direction.
They are of the same priority if two roads are running in parallel. AV
Therefore, the vehicle mark may appear on either of them alter-
nately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and con-
figuration of the road.
SEL686V O
AV-411
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
• Map-matching does not function correctly when a road on which
the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map DVD-
ROM, or when road pattern stored in the map data and the actual
road pattern are different due to repair.
The map-matching function may find another road and position the
vehicle mark on it when driving on a road not present in the map.
Then, the vehicle mark may change to it when the correct road is
detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the map DVD-ROM is limited. Therefore, correction by
SKIA0613E
map-matching is not possible when there is an excessive gap
between current vehicle position and the position on the map.
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
GPS (Global Positioning System) was developed for and is con-
trolled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS
satellites (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an
orbit around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km
(13,100miles).
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimen-
sional positioning). The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's posi-
tion in two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data
calculated previously with radio waves from four or more GPS satel-
SEL526V
lites (two-dimensional positioning) if radio waves were received only
from three GPS satellites.
Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped.
Accuracy of GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:
• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The accuracy can be even lower depending on the arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the posi-
tioning.
• Position detection is not possible when vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do not
reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from the
GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
NOTE:
• Even a high-precision three dimensional positioning, the detection result has an error about 10 m (30ft).
• Because the signals of GPS satellite is controlled by the Tracking and Control Center in the United States,
the accuracy may be degraded lower intentionally or the radio waves may stop.
AV-412
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV
P
JPNIA1059ZZ

AV-413
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
16. Antenna amp. 17. GPS antenna 18. Rear door speaker RH
28. Microphone
D. Within rear pillar finisher RH E. Within rear pillar finisher RH F. Within rear parcel shelf finisher

• It is the master unit that controls each operation of the Navigation system.
AV CONTROL UNIT • The RGB signal (map information) is output to the display unit.
• The voice guidance signal is output to the BOSE amp.
NAVI CONTROL UNIT • NAVI control unit sends map data to AV control unit.
• The voice guidance signal is output to the AV control unit.
• Map image signal is input from NAVI control unit via AV control unit.
DISPLAY UNIT
• Each operation of navigation can be performed by the touch panel function.
Voice guidance signal is input from AV control unit, and it is output to front LH/RH
BOSE AMP.
speakers.
FRONT SPEAKER
Voice guidance signal from BOSE amp. is output.
FRONT SQUAWKER
• Each operation of navigation can be performed.
• Each operation of navigation, etc. can be performed.
STEERING SWITCH
• Switch operating signal is output to AV control unit.
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and is output to NAVI control unit.
AV-414
A
JSNIA1313GB
G
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE H

camera control unit is input. I
image displayed by the communication signal between AV control unit and display unit with the camera J
image.
• Camera control unit controls the direction and distance of predicted course line according to the sensor sig- K
L
M
AV
JSNIA1325GB
AV-415
JSNIA0708GB

and sensor signal.
AV-416
AV
P
JPNIA1059ZZ

AV-417
16. Antenna amp. 17. GPS antenna 18. Rear door speaker RH
28. Microphone
D. Within rear pillar finisher RH E. Within rear pillar finisher RH F. Within rear parcel shelf finisher

• Image on display is transmitted to rear view monitor image by serial communi-
AV CONTROL UNIT
unit.
• Superimposes the guiding line and predicted course line to the camera image
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
dicted course line.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
Steering signal necessary for predicted course line control is transmitted to cam-
era control unit.
AV-418
A
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B

The on/off operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be checked.
Self-Diagnosis Mode
• Press the “back” switch and the “up” switch of the 8-direction C
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from off
to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. then the buzzer
sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and the self- D
diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the on position can be checked by
pressing the switch. the buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE: E
JSNIA1289GB
F

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch off.
G
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis. H
anything, the multifunction switch does not function. etc.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS I
Description
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually. J
• The self-diagnosis mode performs diagnoses on the AV control unit and NAVI control unit, connections
between system components as well as connections between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna and
between NAVI control unit and TEL antenna. Then it displays the diagnosis results on the display. K
ment automatically. L
Mode Description M
• NAVI control unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis • Diagnoses the connections across system components, between AV
NAVI control unit and GPS antenna and between NAVI control unit and
TEL antenna.
AV-419
Mode Description
The confirmations of the tint with the color spectrum bar display and
Display Diagnosis
shading of color with the gradation bar display can be performed.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals
Handsfree Voice Mi-
Microphone speaker check can be performed.
crophone Test
Color Spectrum Bar A color tone can be checked by the color bar display.
Gradation Bar A light and shade can be checked by the gray scale display.
Touch Panel Touch panel response check can be performed.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals
Navigation/Phone lights, and reverse.
Confirm/Change
The passkey can be checked and changed.
Bluetooth Passkey
Confirm/Change
Bluetooth Device The device name can be checked and changed.
Confirmation/ Name
Adjustment
Handsfree Sound
Not available.
Quality Set
* Not used.
Climate Control
that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the
Camera Cont. guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjust-
ed.
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
NOTE:
*: On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT-III is supported.
STARTING PROCEDURE
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
JSNIA1290GB
AV-420
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the
items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be A
selected.
JSNIA0512GB
D
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trou- E
ble diagnosis.
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com- F

G
Con-
line H
Normal Green Green
I
NOTE:
• In case of connection malfunction of GPS or TEL antenna, diagnosis result follows “unit malfunction”
J
way to display.
The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-648, "Exploded View".
- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a K
JSNIA0514GB AV
• Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line O
not be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and P
AV-421

to take

unit power supply and ground circuits. no malfunction in those components,
JSNIA1314GB
NOTE:
malfunction”
NAVI control unit malfunction is detect-

Replace NAVI control unit.
ed.
JSNIA1315GB

items is detected:
• BOSE amp. malfunction is detected. • Replace BOSE amp.
• sound signal circuits between BOSE • Malfunctioning speaker circuits
amp. and each speaker is malfunc-
tioning.
JPNIA1091GB

items is detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • DVD player power supply and
• AV communication circuits between ground circuits
BOSE amp. and DVD player are • AV communication circuits between
malfunctioning. BOSE amp. and DVD player
AV control unit and DVD player is
malfunctioning.
JSNIA1316GB
AV-422
to take A
Camera connection recognition signal Camera connection recognition signal

circuit is detected. circuit C
D
JSNIA1317GB

items is detected:
• BOSE amp. power supply and
F
circuits
AV control unit and BOSE amp. is G
malfunctioning.
JSNIA1318GB H
When either one of the following I

items is detected:
Rear control switch power supply and
ground circuits J
K
JSNIA1319GB
Malfunction is detected in AV commu- M

nication circuits between NAVI control
unit and BOSE amp.
AV
JSNIA1320GB
O
AV-423
to take
items is detected: • AV communication circuits between
• malfunction is detected in AV com- rear control switch and camera con-
munication circuits between rear trol unit
control switch and camera control • AV communication circuits between
unit. camera control unit and NAVI control
• malfunction is detected in AV com- unit
control unit and NAVI control unit.
items is detected: • AV communication circuits between
• malfunction is detected in AV com- multifunction switch and camera
munication circuits between multi- control unit
JSNIA1321GB function switch and camera control • AV communication circuits between
unit. camera control unit and NAVI control
• malfunction is detected in AV com- unit
control unit and NAVI control unit.
Malfunction is detected in AV commu- AV communication circuits between

nication circuits between multifunction multifunction switch and rear control
switch and rear control switch. switch
JSNIA1322GB
GPS antenna connection malfunction

Replace GPS antenna.
is detected.
JSNIA1323GB
AV-424
to take A
TEL antenna connection malfunction

Replace TEL antenna. C
is detected.
D
JSNIA1324GB
F
NAVI control unit power supply and NAVI control unit power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. ground circuits.
JPNIA1106GB H
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode I
the “BACK” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust- J
ment Mode screen.
JSNIA0489GB
Display Diagnosis M
AV
JSNIA0148GB
AV-425

Vehicle Signals
the signals recognized by the AV control unit.
JSNIA0149GB

Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed ON
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
ON Parking brake is applied.
Parking brake
ON Light switch ON.
Lights —
OFF Light switch OFF.
ON Ignition switch ON.
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position.
ON Selector lever in R position.
Reverse Selector lever in any position other Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
OFF
than R.
Navigation/Phone
Handsfree Voice Microphone Test

• Microphone speaker check can be performed. A microphone input
level is displayed.
JSNIA0490GB
Color Spectrum Bar
AV-426
• A color tone can be checked by the color bar display.
NOTE: A
The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB
signal error is detected.
B
B (blue) signal error : Yellow tint C
JSNIA0491GB
D
Gradation Bar
• A color tone can be checked by the color bar display.
E
JSNIA0492GB
H
Touch Panel
• Touch panel response check can be performed.
I
JSNIA0493GB
Vehicle Signals L
• A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal
and the signals recognized by the NAVI control unit.
M
AV
O
JSNIA0516GB
P
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
ON Parking brake is applied.
Parking brake
AV-427
ON Light switch ON.
Lights —
OFF Light switch OFF.
ON Selector lever in R position.
Reverse Selector lever in any position other Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
OFF
than R.
Confirm/Change Bluetooth Passkey

• The passkey of Bluetooth can be confirmed and changed.
• The passkey can be changed by four to eight digits within the num-
ber of 0 to 9.
JSNIA0086GB
Confirm/Change Bluetooth Device Name

• The device name of Bluetooth can be confirmed and changed.
• The device name can be changed within the range of twenty digits
of alphabets and codes.
JSNIA0517GB
Speaker Test
Select “SPEAKER TEST” to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen.
Press “START and NEXT” to generate a test tone in a speaker.
Press “Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Press “End”
to stop the test tones.
NOTE:
Tweeter : 3 kHz
Front door speaker : 300 Hz
Rear door speaker : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB
Climate Control
Refer to HAC-159, "WITH INTELLIGENT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM : CONSULT-III Function" for details.
Error History
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
The frequency of occurrence in error history is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method
differs depending on the error item.
Count up method A
AV-428
condition is normal at a next IGN ON cycle. A
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored.“ The counter can be reset (no error
Count up method B
B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT-III. C

rence frequency
D
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication)
E
J
JSNIA0518GB
Error item
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items K

Perform diagnosis with CONSULT-III, and L
ed.
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect- M
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
malfunction is detected. AV
Amplifier Temperature Error BOSE amp. malfunction is detected. Replace the BOSE amp. O
detected:
• display unit power supply and ground cir- P
• serial communication circuits between circuits.
functioning. display unit and AV control unit.
functioning.
AV-429
Camera connection recognition signal cir- Camera connection recognition signal cir-
Camera Cont. Unit Connection Error
cuit is detected. cuit.
Center speaker OUT: open Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
open.
Center speaker OUT: short shorted between center speaker signal (+) Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
Center speaker OUT: short to ground Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
ground is shorted.
Center speaker OUT: short to battery Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
tery is shorted.
FR speaker OUT: open
open. cuit.
FR speaker OUT: short shorted between front speaker RH signal
cuit.
FR speaker OUT: short to ground
FR speaker OUT: short to battery
RR speaker OUT: open
open. cuit.
RR speaker OUT: short shorted between rear speaker LH signal (+)
cuit.
Sound signal rear speaker RH circuit to Check sound signal rear speaker RH cir-
RR speaker OUT: short to ground
RR speaker OUT: short to battery
RR Woofer OUT: open Sound signal woofer RH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
RR Woofer OUT: short between woofer RH signal (+) and woofer Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
RH signal (-).
Sound signal woofer RH circuit to ground is
RR Woofer OUT: short to ground Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
shorted.
RR Woofer OUT: short to battery Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
shorted.
RL Woofer OUT: open Sound signal woofer LH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
RL Woofer OUT: short between woofer LH signal (+) and woofer Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
LH signal (-).
RL Woofer OUT: short to ground Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
shorted.
RL Woofer OUT: short to battery Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
shorted.
RL speaker OUT: open Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
open.
RL speaker OUT: short shorted between rear speaker LH signal (+) Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit to
RL speaker OUT: short to ground Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
ground is shorted.
RL speaker OUT: short to battery Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
tery is shorted.
AV-430
A
FL speaker OUT: open
open. cuit.
Check sound signal front speaker LH cir- B
FL speaker OUT: short shorted between front speaker LH signal
cuit.
FL speaker OUT: short to ground
ground is shorted. cuit. C
FL speaker OUT: short to battery
Sound signal front squawker LH circuit is Check sound signal front squawker LH cir- D
FL tweeter OUT: open
open. cuit.
FL tweeter OUT: short shorted between front squawker LH signal E
cuit.
FL tweeter OUT: short to ground
F
FL tweeter OUT: short to battery
FR tweeter OUT: open G
open. cuit.
FR tweeter OUT: short shorted between front squawker RH signal
cuit. H
FR tweeter OUT: short to ground
I
FR tweeter OUT: short to battery
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de-
GPS Antenna Error Replace the GPS antenna. J
tected.
DVD Navi Internal Error NAVI control unit malfunction is detected. Replace the NAVI control unit.
TEL antenna connection malfunction is de-
Bluetooth module Error TEL antenna. K
tected.
AV COMM CIRCUIT
L
detected:
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Multifunction switch power supply and M
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between AV ground circuits.
• AV communication signal between AV AV
malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT NAVI control unit power supply and ground NAVI control unit power supply and ground O
• DVD Navi Unit Connection Error circuits are malfunctioning. circuits.
detected:
• BOSE amp. power supply and ground P
• AV COMM CIRCUIT BOSE amp. power supply and ground cir-
• Amplifier Connection Error cuits.
control unit and BOSE amp is malfunc-
tioning.
AV-431
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Camera control unit power supply and
• Rear view Camera connection Error ground circuits.
malfunctioning.
detected:
• DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits are malfunctioning. • DVD player power supply and ground cir-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between cuits.
• DVD Deck Connection Error BOSE amp. and DVD player are mal- • AV communication circuits between
functioning. BOSE amp. and DVD player.
tioning.
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
NAVI control unit and BOSE amp. are AV communication circuits between NAVI
malfunctioning. control unit and BOSE amp.
tioning.
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between cam-
• DVD Deck Connection Error era control unit and NAVI control unit are AV communication circuits between cam-
• Amplifier Connection Error malfunctioning. era control unit and NAVI control unit.
• DVD Navi Unit Connection Error • AV communication signal between AV
control unit and NAVI control unit is mal-
functioning.
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT cation circuits between camera control
• DVD Deck Connection Error unit and NAVI control unit.
• Rear view Camera connection Error Without rear control switch
• DVD Navi Unit Connection Error When either one of the following items is
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT detected:
• Switches Connection Error • AV communication circuits between AV
• DVD Deck Connection Error control unit and multifunction switch are AV communication circuits between AV
• Amplifier Connection Error malfunctioning. control unit and multifunction switch.
• DVD Navi Unit Connection Error • AV communication signal between AV
• Rear view Camera connection Error control unit and multifunction switch are
malfunctioning.
Camera Cont.
AV-432
• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed. A
B
C
Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
JSNIA1287GB D
Rx (BCM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39 E
Rx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
F
AV COMM Diagnosis
G
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39. H
Status Counter I
Items
(Current) (Past)
JSNIA1292GB
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39 J
C Rx(Amp–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
K
C Rx(DVD–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(DVDNavi–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39 L
C Rx(AmpAudio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(DVDAudio–ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 – 39
M
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been AV
removed)
JSNIA0522GB
Initialize Settings
AV-433
Initializes the AV control unit memory.
JSNIA0155GB
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF once after using CONSULT-III. (Navigation system may mal-
function if normally used when the ignition switch is not turned OFF after using CONSULT-III.)

Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication
AV COMMUNICATION
AV&NAVI C/U
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.

ed.
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] Refer to AV-648, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
CAN CONT [U1216]
Replace the BOSE amp.
AMP TEMP [U1231] BOSE amp. is detected. Refer to AV-657, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
AV-434
A
detected:
• display unit power supply and ground cir- • Display unit power supply and ground
cuits are malfunctioning. circuits. B
• serial communication circuits between Refer toAV-465, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diag-
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243]
display unit and AV control unit are mal- nosis Procedure".
functioning. • Serial communication circuits between
• serial communication signal between display unit and AV control unit C
functioning.
Camera connection recognition signal cir- D
CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] cuit.
cuit malfunction is detected.
CENTER SP OPEN [U1260] Check sound signal center speaker circuit. E
open.
CENTER SP SHORT [U1261] shorted between center speaker signal (+) Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
and center speaker signal (-). F
CENTER SP GND-SHORT [U1262] Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
ground is shorted.
Sound signal center speaker circuit to bat- G
CENTER SP VB-SHORT [U1263] Check sound signal center speaker circuit.
tery is shorted.
FR-DOOR SP OPEN [U1264]
open. cuit. H
FR-DOOR SP SHORT [U1265] shorted between front speaker RH signal
cuit.
I
FR-DOOR SP GND-SHORT [U1266]
Sound signal front speaker RH circuit to Check sound signal front speaker RH cir- J
FR-DOOR SP VB-SHORT [U1267]
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER OPEN [U1268] Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
open.
K
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER SHORT [U1269] shorted between rear speaker LH signal (+) Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
L
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER GND-SHORT Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit to
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER VB-SHORT [U126B] Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit. M
tery is shorted.
RR-SURROUND SP OPEN [U126C] Sound signal woofer RH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
RR-SURROUND SP SHORT [U126D] between woofer RH signal (+) and woofer Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
AV
RH signal (-).
RR-SURROUND SP GND-SHORT Sound signal woofer RH circuit to ground is
Check sound signal woofer RH circuit. O
[U126E] shorted.
RR-SURROUND SP VB-SHORT [U126F] Check sound signal woofer RH circuit.
shorted.
RL-SURROUND SP OPEN [U1274] Sound signal woofer LH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit. P
RL-SURROUND SP SHORT [U1275] between woofer LH signal (+) and woofer Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
LH signal (-).
RL-SURROUND SP GND-SHORT [U1276] Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
shorted.
AV-435
RL-SURROUND SP VB-SHORT [U1277] Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
shorted.
RL-SP/FL-WOOFER OPEN [U1278] Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
open.
RL-SP/FL-WOOFER SHORT [U1279] shorted between rear speaker LH signal (+) Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
RL-SP/FL-WOOFER GND-SHORT Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit to
RL-SP/FL-WOOFER VB-SHORT [U127B] Check sound signal rear speaker LH circuit.
tery is shorted.
FL-DOOR SP OPEN [U127C]
open. cuit.
FL-DOOR SP SHORT [U127D] shorted between front speaker LH signal
cuit.
FL-DOOR SP GND-SHORT [U127E]
FL-DOOR SP VB-SHORT [U127F]
FR-TWEETER OPEN [U1294]
open. cuit.
FR-TWEETER SHORT [U1295] shorted between front squawker RH signal
cuit.
FR-TWEETER GND-SHORT [U1296]
FR-TWEETER VB-SHORT [U1297]
Sound signal front squawker LH circuit is Check sound signal front squawker LH cir-
FL-TWEETER OPEN [U1298]
open. cuit.
FL-TWEETER SHORT [U1299] shorted between front squawker LH signal
cuit.
FL-TWEETER GND-SHORT [U129A]
FL-TWEETER VB-SHORT [U129B]
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- GPS antenna.
GPS ANTENNA CONN [U12A0]
tected. Refer to AV-459, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Replace the NAVI control unit.
NAVI INTERNAL ERR [U12A1] NAVI control unit malfunction is detected. Refer to AV-649, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
TEL antenna connection malfunction is de- TEL antenna.
BT ANTENNA CONN [U12A2]
tected. Refer to AV-461, "Diagnosis Procedure".
detected:
• multifunction switch power supply and • Multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. ground circuits.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between AV Refer to AV-466, "MULTIFUNCTION
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and multifunction switch.
malfunctioning.
AV-436
A
detected:
• DVD player power supply and ground cir- • DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits are malfunctioning. cuits. B
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between Refer to AV-468, "DVD PLAYER : Diag-
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] BOSE amp. and DVD player are mal- nosis Procedure".
functioning. • AV communication circuits between
• AV communication signal between AV BOSE amp. and DVD player. C
tioning.
When either one of the following items is D
detected:
BOSE amp. power supply and ground cir-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] cuits.
• AMP CONN [U124E] Refer to AV-466, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis
• AV communication signal between AV E
Procedure".
tioning
F
detected:
Camera control unit power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
• REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] Refer to AV-467, "CAMERA CONTROL
• AV communication signal between AV G
malfunctioning.
NAVI control unit power supply and ground
H
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuits.
• DVD NAVI CONN [U125D] circuits are malfunctioning. Refer to AV-464, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure".
When either one of the following items is I
detected:
NAVI control unit and BOSE amp is mal- AV communication circuits between NAVI
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] J
functioning. control unit and BOSE amp.
control unit and BOSE amp. is maifunc-
tioning.
K
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] • AV communication circuits between cam-
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] era control unit and NAVI control unit is AV communication circuits between cam- L
• AMP CONN [U124E] malfunctioning. era control unit and NAVI control unit.
• DVD NAVI CONN [U125D] • AV communication signal between AV
control unit and NAVI control unit is mal-
functioning.
M
AV
AV-437
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] cation circuits between camera control
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] unit and NAVI control unit.
• REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] Without rear control switch
• DVD NAVI CONN [U125D] When either one of the following items is
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] detected:
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] • AV communication circuits between AV
• DVD DECK CONN [U1248] control unit and multifunction switch are AV communication circuits between AV
• AMP CONN [U124E] malfunctioning. control unit and multifunction switch.
• REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252] • AV communication signal between AV
• DVD NAVI CONN [U125D] control unit and multifunction switch is
malfunctioning.
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
Dis-
play
On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
On Parking brake is applied. mal.
PKB SIG
On Light switch ON.
ILLUM SIG
Off Light switch OFF.
—
IGN SIG
On Selector lever in R position.
Off mal.
than R.
SELECTION FROM MENU

selected vehicle signals.
AV-438
Item to be selected Description A

VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
The same as when “ALL SIGNALS” B
ILLUM SIG
is selected.
IGN SIG
REV SIG C
AV
AV-439
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT-III
onds or more.

AV-440
A


SULT-III D

>> INSPECTION END

G
AV
AV-441

unit.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
[U1310] detected.
AV-442
A

• It is connected to ECM and combination meter. via CAN communication to ob- D
• Composite image signal (AUX and DVD images) is input from DVD player. E
unit.
• Sound signal (DVD and AUX sounds) is input from the DVD player. F
G
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display contents of
DTC Detection Condition Action to take
H
CONSULT-III
Cont Unit
I
[U1200]
AV
AV-443

unit.
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
[U1216] detected.
AV-444
U1231 BOSE AMP.
U1231 BOSE AMP.
A
Replace the BOSE amp. if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-657, "Removal and Installation". B

Inputs sound signal from AV control unit and DVD player, and outputs sound sig- C
BOSE AMP.

D
Display contents of
CONSULT-III E
AMP TEMP
U1231 Internal malfunction of BOSE amp. is detected. Replace BOSE amp.
[U1231]
AV
AV-445
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

chronizing).
DISPLAY UNIT
trol unit.
• Touch panel function can be operated for each system by touching a display
directly.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
FRONT DISP CONN
[U1243]

YES >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
11 56
M49 M129 Existed
22 44
Display unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
11
M49 Not existed
22
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV-446
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL A

B
(+)
Display unit (−) Condition Reference value C
Connector Terminal

M49 11 Ground
ness.
E
PKIB5039J
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
G
H
(+)
I
Connector Terminal
J
M49 22 Ground
ness.
K
PKIB5039J

M
AV
AV-447

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CAMERA CONT. CONN Malfunction is detected in camera connection recogni- Camera connection recognition sig-
U1250


Continuity
M130 68 B251 14 Existed
AV control unit
Continuity
M130 68 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and camera control unit connector.
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Connected camera
0V
M130 68 Ground
Disconnect camera
5V
AV-448
A
AV
AV-449

CENTER SPEAKER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
CENTER SP OPEN Check sound signal center speaker
U1260 Sound signal center speaker circuit is open.
[U1260] circuit.
CENTER SP SHORT Sound signal center speaker circuit is shorted between Check sound signal center speaker
U1261
[U1261] center speaker signal (+) and center speaker signal (-). circuit.
CENTER SP GND- Check sound signal center speaker
U1262 Sound signal center speaker circuit to ground is shorted.
CENTER SP VB- Check sound signal center speaker
U1263 Sound signal center speaker circuit to battery is shorted.

YES >> Repair sound signal center speaker circuit harness or connector.
AV-450
A
B
FRONT RIGHT DOOR SPEAKER
C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
FR-DOOR SP OPEN Check sound signal front speaker RH
U1264 Sound signal front speaker RH circuit is open.
[U1264] circuit.
Sound signal front speaker RH circuit is shorted between F
FR-DOOR SP SHORT Check sound signal front speaker RH
U1265 front speaker RH signal (+) and front speaker RH signal (-
[U1265] circuit.
).
U1266
FR-DOOR SP GND- Sound signal front speaker RH circuit to ground is short- Check sound signal front speaker RH G
SHORT [U1266] ed. circuit.
FR-DOOR SP VB- Sound signal front speaker RH circuit to battery is short- Check sound signal front speaker RH
U1267
SHORT [U1267] ed. circuit. H

YES >> Repair sound signal front speaker RH circuit harness or connector.
AV
AV-451

REAR RIGHT DOOR SPEAKER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit is shorted between Check sound signal rear speaker LH
U1269
GND- SHORT [U126A] circuit.

YES >> Repair sound signal rear speaker RH circuit harness or connector.
AV-452
U126C, U126D, U126E, U126F REAR RIGHT SQUAWKER/ RIGHT WOOFER
U126C, U126D, U126E, U126F REAR RIGHT SQUAWKER/ RIGHT WOOF-
A
ER
B

• Outputs sound signal from BOSE amp. C
REAR RIGHT SQUAWKER
RIGHT WOOFER
• Outputs low frequency sound. D
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes F
CONSULT-III
U126C Sound signal woofer RH circuit is open.
OPEN [U126C] cuit.
G
RR-SURROUND SP Sound signal woofer RH circuit is shorted between woofer Check sound signal woofer RH cir-
U126D
SHORT [U12D1] RH signal (+) and woofer RH signal (-). cuit.
U126E
GND- SHORT [U126E]
Sound signal woofer RH circuit to ground is shorted.
cuit.
H

U126F Sound signal woofer RH circuit to battery is shorted.
VB-SHORT [U126F] cuit.
I
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS J

3. Check that the DTC is detected again. K
YES >> Repair sound signal woofer RH circuit harness or connector.
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". L
AV
AV-453

REAR RIGHT SQUAWKER
RIGHT WOOFER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
RL-SURROUND SP
U1274 Sound signal woofer LH circuit is open. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
OPEN [U1274]
RL-SURROUND SP Sound signal woofer LH circuit is shorted between woofer
U1275 Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
SHORT [U1275] LH signal (+) and woofer LH signal (-).
RL-SURROUND SP
U1276 Sound signal woofer LH circuit to ground is shorted. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
GND- SHORT [U1276]
RL-SURROUND SP
U1277 Sound signal woofer LH circuit to battery is shorted. Check sound signal woofer LH circuit.
VB-SHORT [U1277]

YES >> Repair sound signal woofer LH circuit harness or connector.
AV-454
A
B
REAR LEFT DOOR SPEAKER
C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
RL- SP/FL-WOOFER Sound signal rear speaker LH circuit is shorted between Check sound signal rear speaker LH F
U1279
GND- SHORT [U127A] circuit. G
H

J
YES >> Repair sound signal rear speaker LH circuit harness or connector.
K
AV
AV-455

FRONT LEFT DOOR SPEAKER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
FL- DOOR SP OPEN Check sound signal front speaker LH
U127C Sound signal front speaker LH circuit is open.
[U127C] circuit.
FL- DOOR SP SHORT Sound signal front speaker LH circuit is shorted between Check sound signal front speaker LH
U127D
[U127D] front speaker LH signal (+) and front speaker LH signal (-). circuit.
FL- DOOR SP GND- Check sound signal front speaker LH
U127E Sound signal front speaker LH circuit to ground is shorted.
SHORT [U127E] circuit.
FL- DOOR SP VB- Check sound signal front speaker LH
U127F Sound signal front speaker LH circuit to battery is shorted.
SHORT [U127F] circuit.

YES >> Repair sound signal front speaker LH circuit harness or connector.
AV-456
A
B
FRONT RIGHT SQUAWKER
C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
U1294 Sound signal front squawker RH circuit is open.
[U1294] RH circuit.
Sound signal front squawker RH circuit is shorted be- F
U1295 tween front squawker RH signal (+) and front squawker
[U1295] RH circuit.
RH signal (-).
U1296
FR-TWEETER GND- Sound signal front squawker RH circuit to ground is short- Check sound signal front squawker G
SHORT [U1296] ed. RH circuit.
FR-TWEETER VB- Sound signal front squawker RH circuit to battery is short- Check sound signal front squawker
U1297
SHORT [U1297] ed. RH circuit. H

YES >> Repair sound signal front squawker RH circuit harness or connector.
AV
AV-457

FRONT LEFT SQUAWKER
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
U1298 Sound signal front squawker LH circuit is open.
[U1298] LH circuit.
Sound signal front squawker LH circuit is shorted between
U1299 front squawker LH signal (+) and front squawker LH signal
[U1299] LH circuit.
(-).
FR-TWEETER GND- Sound signal front squawker LH circuit to ground is short- Check sound signal front squawker
U129A
SHORT [U129A] ed. LH circuit.
FR-TWEETER VB- Sound signal front squawker LH circuit to battery is short- Check sound signal front squawker
U129B
SHORT [U129B] ed. LH circuit.

YES >> Repair sound signal front squawker LH circuit harness or connector.
AV-458
U12A0 GPS ANTENNA
U12A0 GPS ANTENNA
A
B
GPS ANTENNA GPS signal is received and transmitted to NAVI control unit.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC D
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
E
GPS ANTENNA CONN
U12A0 GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected. GPS antenna.
[U12A0]

F
1.GPS ANTENNA CHECK

Visually check GPS antenna and antenna feeder. G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts. H
2.CHECK NAVI CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect GPS antenna connector.
4. Check voltage between NAVI control unit terminal and ground.
J
(+)
Voltage
NAVI control unit
(−) (Approx.) K
Connector Terminal
YES >> Replace GPS antenna.
NO >> Replace NAVI control unit.
M
AV
AV-459
U12A1 NAVI CONTROL UNIT
U12A1 NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Replace the NAVI control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-649, "Removal and Installation".

• The NAVI control unit sends map data to the AV control unit.
• The NAVI control unit includes the hands-free phone and navigation functions.
NAVI CONTROL UNIT • The NAVI control unit transmits navigation and hands-free phone related imag-
es to AV control unit.
• It includes the TEL adapter and Bluetooth™ function.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
NAVI INTERNAL ERR
U12A1 NAVI control unit malfunction is detected. Replace the NAVI control unit.
[U12A1]
AV-460
U12A2 TEL ANTENNA
U12A2 TEL ANTENNA
A
B
TEL ANTENNA TEL voice signal is received and transmitted to NAVI control unit.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC D
Display contents of
CONSULT-III
E
BT ANTENNA CONN
U12A2 TEL antenna connection malfunction is detected. TEL antenna
[U12A2]

F
1.TEL ANTENNA CHECK

Visually check TEL antenna and antenna feeder. G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts. H
2.CHECK NAVI CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect TEL antenna connector.
4. Check voltage between NAVI control unit terminal and ground.
J
(+)
Voltage
NAVI control unit
(−) (Approx.) K
Connector Terminal
YES >> Replace TEL antenna.
M
AV
AV-461
U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta-
Self-diagnosis results display item

DTC Description
CONSULT-III take
• Multifunction switch power supply
• multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Refer to AV-466, "MULTIFUNC-
are malfunctioning.
U1300 [U1300] TION SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit and
U1240 • SWITCH CONN dure".
multifunction switch are malfunctioning.
tween AV control unit and multi-
multifunction switch is malfunctioning.
function switch.
• DVD player power supply and ground circuits are mal-
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
functioning.
U1300 [U1300] Refer to AV-468, "DVD PLAYER :
• AV communication circuits between BOSE amp. and
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN Diagnosis Procedure".
DVD player are malfunctioning.
tween BOSE amp. and DVD player.
DVD player is malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuits are mal-
U1300 circuits.
[U1300] functioning.
U124E Refer to AV-466, "BOSE AMP. : Diag-
• AMP CONN [U124E] • AV communication signal between AV control unit and
nosis Procedure".
BOSE amp. is malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT Camera control unit power supply
• camera control unit power supply and ground circuits
U1300 [U1300] and ground circuits.
are malfunctioning.
U1252 • REAR-CAMERA LAN Refer to AV-467, "CAMERA CON-
CONN [U1252] TROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
camera control unit is malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT NAVI control unit power supply and
U1300 [U1300] NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuits are ground circuits.
U125D • DVD NAVI CONN malfunctioning. Refer to AV-464, "NAVI CONTROL
[U125D] UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
• AV COMM CIRCUIT When either one of the following items is detected:
U1300 [U1300] • AV communication circuits between NAVI control unit
U1248 • DVD DECK CONN and BOSE amp. are malfunctioning.
U124E [U1248] • AV communication signal between NAVI control unit
• AMP CONN [U124E] and BOSE amp. is malfunctioning.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300] When either one of the following items is detected:
U1300
• DVD DECK CONN • AV communication circuits between camera control unit AV communication circuits between
U1248
[U1248] and NAVI control unit are malfunctioning. camera control unit and NAVI control
U124E
• AMP CONN [U124E] • AV communication signal between camera control unit unit.
U125D
• DVD NAVI CONN and NAVI control unit is malfunctioning.
[U125D]
AV-462
DTC Description
CONSULT-III take A
With rear control switch • AV communication circuits be-
When either one of the following items is detected: tween multifunction switch and rear
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits control switch. B
[U1300] between rear control switch and camera control unit. • AV communication circuits be-
U1300 • DVD DECK CONN • malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits tween rear control switch and cam-
U1248 [U1248] between camera control unit and NAVI control unit. era control unit.
U124E • AMP CONN [U124E] C
U1252 • REAR-CAMERA LAN Without rear control switch
U125D CONN [U1252] When either one of the following items is detected:
• DVD NAVI CONN • malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits
multifunction switch and camera con-
[U125D] between multifunction switch and camera control unit. D
trol unit.
• malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits
between camera control unit and NAVI control unit.
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
[U1300] E
• SWITCH CONN
U1300
[U1240] When either one of the following items is detected:
U1240
• DVD DECK CONN • AV communication circuits between AV control unit and AV communication circuits between
U1248 F
[U1248] multifunction switch are malfunctioning. AV control unit and multifunction
U124E
• AMP CONN [U124E] • AV communication signal between AV control unit and switch.
U1252
• REAR-CAMERA LAN multifunction switch is malfunctioning.
U125D
CONN [U1252] G
• DVD NAVI CONN
[U125D]
AV
AV-463
AV CONTROL UNIT
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 31
YES >> GO TO 2.
M127
YES >> GO TO 3.
M127 20
Ground OFF Existed
M131 85
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003765896
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 31
YES >> GO TO 2.
AV-464
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connectors and ground.
B
Is inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between NAVI control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT D

2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. E
3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connectors and ground.
F
YES >> INSPECTION END G
DISPLAY UNIT
H
1.CHECK FUSE I

J
Battery 31
Is inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L

M
M49 Battery voltage
ACC power supply 3 ACC AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between display unit and fuse. O
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Disconnect display unit connector.
1
Ground M49 OFF Existed
13
AV-465
1.CHECK FUSE

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003765899
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 32, 33
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
AV-466
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Voltage (Approx.) A
10
Battery power supply B224 OFF
11 Battery voltage
ACC power supply B225 20 ACC
B

YES >> GO TO 3. C
NO >> Check harness between BOSE amp. and fuse.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector and ground.
E
7
Ground B224 OFF Existed
12 F
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003765900 H
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses. I

Battery 31
J
Is inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS L
Signal name Connector No. Terminal No. Ignition switch position Voltage (Approx.) M
AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between camera control unit and fuse. O
2. Disconnect camera control unit connector. P
AV-467
DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003794711
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 31
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check voltage between DVD player harness connectors and ground.
M254 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between DVD player and fuse.
2. Disconnect DVD player connectors.
3. Check continuity between DVD player harness connectors and ground.
AV-468
A
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
Display unit
Continuity
M49 17 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL I
(+)
Connector Terminal
L
M49 17 Ground
SKIB2238J
AV
AV-469
UNIT)


Continuity
Display unit
Continuity
M49 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal

M49 6 Ground
SKIB2236J

AV-470
A
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit or NAVI control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
Display unit
Continuity
M49 18 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL I
(+)
Connector Terminal
L
M49 18 Ground
SKIB2237J
AV
AV-471
UNIT)
PLAY UNIT)


Continuity
Display unit
Continuity
M49 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 19 Ground —
SKIB3603E

AV-472
A
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit or NAVI control unit with RGB area (YS) B
C
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector. D
Display unit AV control unit E

Continuity
F
Display unit G
Continuity
M49 9 Not existed
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
I
(+) K
Connector Terminal
L
M
M49 9 Ground
AV
PKIB4948J

P
AV-473


Continuity
Display unit
Continuity
M49 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M49 8 Ground —
SKIB3601E

AV-474
A

E
Continuity

G
Display unit
Continuity
M49 20 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.

K
(+)
M
M49 20 Ground —
AV
SKIB3598E

O
P
AV-475
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL UNIT)
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL
UNIT)
Transmit the image displayed with NAVI control unit with RGB signal to the AV control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector.
NAVI control unit AV control unit

Continuity
B255 19 M130 63 Existed
4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and ground.
NAVI control unit

Continuity
B255 19 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL
1. Connect NAVI control unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector terminal and ground using an oscilloscope.
(+)
NAVI control unit (−) Condition Reference value
Connector Terminal

B255 19 Ground
on Navigation/Phone screen.
SKIB2238J

AV-476
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL
UNIT)
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI CONTROL UNIT TO AV CON-
A
TROL UNIT)
B
C
E
Continuity
B255 20 M130 71 Existed F
NAVI control unit

G
Continuity
B255 20 Not existed H
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
K
(+)
Start Confirmation / Adjustment M

B255 20 Ground
AV
SKIB2236J

YES >> Replace AV control unit. O
AV-477
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL
UNIT)
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI CONTROL UNIT TO AV CONTROL
UNIT)
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT


Continuity
B255 21 M130 62 Existed
NAVI control unit

Continuity
B255 21 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal

B255 21 Ground
SKIB2237J

AV-478
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI CONTROL UNIT TO AV CON-
TROL UNIT)
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT (NAVI CONTROL UNIT TO AV
A
CONTROL UNIT)
B
Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed
with NAVI control unit.
C

D
E

Continuity
F
B255 23 M130 60 Existed
G
NAVI control unit
Continuity
H
B255 23 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2. I
J
K
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
B255 23 Ground —
AV
SKIB3603E

P
AV-479
Transmits the image signal of external device from auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect auxiliary input jacks connector and DVD player connector.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jacks harness connector and DVD player harness connector.
Auxiliary input jacks DVD player

Continuity
7 8
M253 M254 Existed
8 10
Auxiliary input jacks

Continuity
M253 7 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect auxiliary input jacks connector and DVD player connector.
(+) (−)
SKIB2251J

YES >> Replace DVD player.
AV-480
A
The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of multifunction switch is pressed. B
1.CHECK CONTINUITY DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT C

3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. D

Continuity E
M125 14 M131 103 Existed
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector and ground. F
Continuity
M125 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE I
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector and ground. J
(+)
AV control unit (−) Condition Reference value K
Connector Terminal
M131 103 Ground L
YES >> Replace preset switch. M
AV
AV-481
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Supply power from NAVI control unit to microphone. The microphone transmits the sound voice to the NAVI
control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN NAVI CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and microphone connector.
3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector and microphone harness connector.
NAVI control unit Microphone

Continuity
39 4
B255 41 R20 1 Existed
42 2
NAVI control unit

Continuity
Connector Terminals
Ground
39
B255 Not existed
41
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
1. Connect NAVI control unit connector.
3. Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector.
(+) (−)
Voltage
NAVI control unit NAVI control unit
(Approx.)
B255 39 B255 42 5V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
2. Connect microphone connector.
4. Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector using an oscilloscope.
AV-482
(+) (−) A
NAVI control unit NAVI control unit Condition Reference value
B
C
B255 41 B255 42 Give a voice.
D
PKIB5037J

YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. E
NO >> Replace microphone.
AV
AV-483
control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and rear view camera harness connec-
tor.
Camera control unit Rear view camera

Continuity
Camera control unit

Continuity
B251 8 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE CAMERA ON SIGNAL
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Selector le-
tion.
B251 8 Ground Other than
selector le-
0V
ver in R posi-
tion.
AV-484
A
control unit.
C
1.CHECK CONTINUITY CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT D

3. Check continuity between camera control unit harness connector and AV control unit harness connector. E

Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals F
11 64
B251 M130 Existed
12 65
G
Camera control unit H

Continuity
B251 12 Not existed
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
(+) L
Connector Terminal
M
B251 12 Ground
When rear view camera AV
image is displayed.
SKIB2251J
O

YES >> Replace AV control unit. P
AV-485
AV control unit that inputs the camera image signal and AUX image signal transmits the composite image sig-
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
AV control unit Display unit

Continuity
36 15
M129 M49 Existed
37 5
AV control unit
Continuity
M129 36 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and display unit connector.
(+) (−)
Connector Terminal
Ground
M129 36
played.
SKIB2251J

AV-486
A
• Steering angle sensor signal 1, 2 detects the turning direction and quantity of the steering and transmits it to B
trol unit.
• Camera control unit performs the correction of neutral position with sensor signal 1, 2, 3 and vehicle speed C
signal.
D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
nector.
F
Continuity
G
23 3
25 8 H
I
Camera control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminals
23 Ground J
B251 24 Not existed
25
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
2. Turn ignition switch ON. M
(+) AV
Voltage
Camera control unit
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminals
O
23
25 P
YES >> GO TO 3.
AV-487
(+)
Connector Terminals
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
23, 24 Ground
B251 Turn the steering to the left
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2

25 Ground
neutral position
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
AV-488
A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
AV control unit
Continuity
M127 6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M127 6 M127 15 3.5 V
AV
YES >> GO TO 4.
O
AV-489

JSNIA0502GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
ENTER switch ON 1983 – 2063
switch ON 709 – 737
14 MENU DOWN switch

315 – 327
ON
M303 M303 17 SOURCE switch ON 1

15
AV-490
A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
AV control unit
Continuity
M127 16 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+) (−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
M127 16 M127 15 3.5 V
AV
YES >> GO TO 4.
O
AV-491

JSNIA0502GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
14 MENU DOWN switch

315 – 327
ON

15
AV-492
A

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT C


Continuity E
4. Connect AV control unit connector. F
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check spiral cable.
H
YES >> GO TO 3.
I
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector and ground. J
AV control unit
Continuity K
M127 15 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK STEERING SWITCH M
AV
AV-493

JSNIA0502GB
Standard
Steering switch
Resistance
Ω
14 MENU DOWN switch

315 – 327
ON

15
AV-494
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
AV CONTROL UNIT
B

CONSULT-III data monitor item C
Dis-
play
On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor- D
VHCL SPD SIG

PKB SIG E
On Light switch ON.

ILLUM SIG —
Off Light switch OFF. F
IGN SIG —
On Selector lever in R position. G
Off mal.
than R.
H
TERMINAL LAYOUT
K
JPNIA1093ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
L
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) M
+ – Signal name
Output
Keep pressing SOURCE
0V
switch. AV
Ignition Keep pressing switch. 1.5 V
6 15
(W/G) (L/B)
Steering switch signal A Input switch O
ON Keep pressing switch. 2.1 V
Keep pressing ENTER

2.8 V
switch. P
Ignition
7
(V/W)
ACC
9
OFF
AV-495
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(L/B) ground
ON
0V
switch.
Keep pressing VOL UP
Ignition 0.8 V
16 15 switch.
Steering switch signal B Input switch
(GR/L) (L/B) 1.5 V
ON Keep pressing switch.

Ignition
19
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
20
(B/W)
ON
Ignition
ACC
Ignition
36 When camera image or
Ground Composite image signal Output switch
(B) AUX image is displayed.
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
37
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
AV-496
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
40 play color bar by selecting C
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J D
E
Ignition
41
(G)
ON
F
SKIB3603E
—Igni-
tion G
42 Ground RGB synchronizing ground — — 0V
switch
ON
When RGB image is dis- H
5.0 V
played.
Ignition I
43
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
ON
J
PKIB4948J
Ignition
44 Communication signal When adjusting display L
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
M
AV
Ignition
(W) (HP) signal
ON
O
SKIB3601E
49 — Shield — — — —
P
—Igni-
tion
50 Ground RGB ground — — 0V
switch
ON
55 Ground Shield — — — —
AV-497
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
(R) signal
ON
SKIB3598E
Ignition
60
(O)
ON
SKIB3603E
Ignition
61 Ground — switch — 0V
ground
ON
Ignition ment mode, and then dis-
62
Ground RGB image signal (B: blue) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(W)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on
Navigation/Phone screen.
SKIB2237J
63
Ground RGB image signal (R: red) Input switch play color bar by selecting
(R)
SKIB2238J
Ignition
64 Ground camera image ground — switch — 0V
ON
Ignition
(Y) played.
ON
SKIB2251J
AV-498
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
66 Composite (DVD and AUX) When AUX image is dis- C
Ground Input switch
(V) image signal played.
ON
SKIB2251J D
Ignition 0V
68 Camera connection recog- trol unit connector
Ground Input switch E
ON 5V
Ignition
70
Ground RGB ground — switch — 0V F
(B)
ON
G
71 RGB image signal (G:
Ground Input switch play color bar by selecting
(G) green)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on H
SKIB2236J
Composite image signal I

73 — — — — —
ground
Ignition
(G)
Ground
image signal ground
— switch — 0V J
ON
Ignition
78
Ground Switch ground — switch — 0V K
(BR)
ON
L
Ignition
80 79
TEL voice signal Input switch TEL voice output.
(B) (W)
ON
M
SKIB1990E
81 — Tel voice shield — — — — AV
Ignition O
83 82 Stereo (DVD and AUX) DVD sound signal or AUX
Input switch
(R) (W) sound signal RH sound signal input
ON
P
SKIB3609E
84 — Voice guidance shield — — — —

Ignition
85
(B/W)
ON
AV-499
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
86 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output
87 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
— — — —
(W) (H) Output
— — — —
(B) (L) Output
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
— — — —
(R) (L) Output
Ignition
99 98 Stereo (DVD and AUX) DVD sound signal or AUX
Input switch
(B) (G) sound signal LH sound input.
ON
SKIB3609E
Stereo (DVD and AUX)

100 — — — — —
sound signal shield
Ignition
102 101
Voice guidance signal Input switch Voice guidance output.
(L) (P)
ON
SKIB1990E
Ignition Pressing the eject switch. 0V

103
ON
Ignition
104
(O)
ON
Ignition R position. 12.0 V
105
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(P/B) Other than R position. 0V
ON
Ignition Parking brake ON. 0V
106
(G/R) Parking brake OFF. 5V
ON
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
JSNIA0012GB
AV-500
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
109 115 Stereo sound signal front C
Output switch Sound output.
(W) (B) RH
ON
SKIB3609E D
111 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
112 118
Voice guidance signal Output switch Voice guidance output.
(BR) (Y) F
ON
SKIB1990E
G
Ignition H
Output switch Sound output.
(W) (B) LH
ON
I
SKIB3609E
AV
AV-501
AV CONTROL UNIT
Wiring Diagram — BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM — INFOID:0000000003971962
JCNWM0897GB
AV-502
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0898GB
AV-503
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0899GB
AV-504
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0900GB
AV-505
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0901GB
AV-506
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0902GB
AV-507
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0903GB
AV-508
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0904GB
AV-509
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0905GB
AV-510
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0906GB
AV-511
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0907GB
AV-512
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0908GB
AV-513
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0909GB
AV-514
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0910GB
AV-515
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0911GB
AV-516
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0912GB
AV-517
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0913GB
AV-518
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0914GB
AV-519
AV CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0915GB
AV-520
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0916GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-521
AV CONTROL UNIT

U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-444, "DTC Logic"
U1231 AMP TEMP [U1231] AV-445, "DTC Logic"
U1250 CAMERA CONT. CONN [U1250] AV-448, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1260 CENTER SP OPEN [U1260] AV-450, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1261 CENTER SP SHORT [U1261] AV-450, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1262 CENTER SP GND-SHORT [U1262] AV-450, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1263 CENTER SP VB-SHORT [U1263] AV-450, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1264 FR-DOOR SP OPEN [U1264] AV-451, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1265 FR-DOOR SP SHORT [U1265] AV-451, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1266 FR-DOOR SP GND-SHORT [U1266] AV-451, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1267 FR-DOOR SP VB-SHORT [U1267] AV-451, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1268 RR-SP/FR-WOOFER OPEN [U1268] AV-452, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1269 RR-SP/FR-WOOFER SHORT [U1269] AV-452, "Diagnosis Procedure"
RR-SP/FR-WOOFER GND-SHORT
[U126A]
U126B RR-SP/FR-WOOFER VB-SHORT [U126B] AV-452, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U126C RR-SURROUND SP OPEN [U126C] AV-453, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U126D RR-SURROUND SP SHORT [U126D] AV-453, "Diagnosis Procedure"
RR-SURROUND SP GND-SHORT
U126E AV-453, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[U126E]
U126F RR-SURROUND SP VB-SHORT [U126F] AV-453, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1274 RL-SURROUND SP OPEN [U1274] AV-454, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1275 RL-SURROUND SP SHORT [U1275] AV-454, "Diagnosis Procedure"
RL-SURROUND SP GND-SHORT
U1276 AV-454, "Diagnosis Procedure"
[U1276]
U1277 RL-SURROUND SP VB-SHORT [U1277] AV-454, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1278 RL-SP/FL-WOOFER OPEN [U1278] AV-455, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1279 RL-SP/FL-WOOFER SHORT [U1279] AV-455, "Diagnosis Procedure"
RL-SP/FL-WOOFER GND-SHORT
[U127A]
U127B RL-SP/FL-WOOFER VB-SHORT [U127B] AV-455, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U127C FL-DOOR SP OPEN [U127C] AV-456, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U127D FL-DOOR SP SHORT [U127D] AV-456, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U127E] FL-DOOR SP GND-SHORT [U127E] AV-456, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U127F FL-DOOR SP VB-SHORT [U127F] AV-456, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1294 FR-TWEETER OPEN [U1294] AV-457, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1295 FR-TWEETER SHORT [U1295] AV-457, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1296 FR-TWEETER GND-SHORT [U1296] AV-457, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1297 FR-TWEETER VB-SHORT [U1297] AV-457, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1298 FL-TWEETER OPEN [U1298] AV-458, "Diagnosis Procedure"
AV-522
AV CONTROL UNIT
A
U1299 FL-TWEETER SHORT [U1299] AV-458, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U129A FL-TWEETER GND-SHORT [U129A] AV-458, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U129B FL-TWEETER VB-SHORT [U129B] AV-458, "Diagnosis Procedure" B
U12A0 GPS ANTENNA CONN [U12A0] AV-459, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U12A1 NAVI INTERNAL ERR [U12A1] AV-460, "DTC Logic"
U12A2 BT ANTENNA CONN [U12A2] AV-461, "Diagnosis Procedure" C
D
U125D • DVD NAVI CONN [U125D]
AV-462, "Description" E
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] F
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] G
U125D • DVD NAVI CONN [U125D]
H
U124E • AMP CONN [U124E] AV-462, "Description"
U125D • DVD NAVI CONN [U125D] I
U1252 • REAR-CAMERA LAN CONN [U1252]
AV
AV-523
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSNIA1170ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(Y)
OFF
Ignition
2
(B)
ON
Ignition
3
(V)
ACC
6 Lighting switch is OFF. 0V

Ground Illumination signal Input OFF
(BR) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V
Ignition Parking brake ON. 0V
8
(SB) Parking brake OFF. 5V
ON
Ignition R position. 12.0 V
9
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(W) Other than R position. 0V
ON
NOTE:
(destination unit).
Ignition
10 vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(O) (8-pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25MPH).
ON
JSNIA0012GB

— — — —
(L/R) (H) Output
— — — —
(L/G) (L) Output
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
AV-524
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
16 AV communication signal Input/ B
— — — —
(P) (L) Output
C
19
Ground RGB image signal (R: red) Output switch play color bar by selecting
(BR/L)
ON “Color Spectrum Bar” on D
SKIB2238J
20 RGB image signal (G: F
Ground Output switch play color bar by selecting
(Y/L) green)
SKIB2236J
G
Start confirmation/adjust- H
21
Ground RGB image signal (B: blue) Output switch play color bar by selecting
(Y/G)
Navigation/Phone screen. I
SKIB2237J
Ignition
22 J
Ground RGB ground — switch — 0V
(W/L)
ON
Ignition
23
(L) L
ON
SKIB3603E
M
Ignition
24 Ground — switch — 0V
ground
ON
AV
Ignition
28 30 O
Voice guidance signal Output switch Voice guidance output.
(L) (P)
ON
SKIB1990E
P
29 — Shield — — — —
AV-525
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
33 35
TEL voice signal Output switch TEL voice output.
(B) (W)
ON
SKIB1990E
34 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
39
42 Microphone VCC Output switch — 5.0 V
(B)
ON
Ignition
41
42 Microphone signal Input switch Give a voice.
(W)
ON
PKIB5037J
42 — Microphone signal shield — — — —

Ignition
Not connected to GPS an-
49 Ground GPS antenna signal Input switch 5.0 V
tenna connector.
ON
50 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Input/ Not connected to TEL an-
51 Ground TEL antenna signal switch 3.3 V
Output tenna connector.
ON
52 — Shield — — — —
AV-526
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0897GB
P
AV-527
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0898GB
AV-528
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0899GB
AV-529
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0900GB
AV-530
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0901GB
AV-531
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0902GB
AV-532
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0903GB
AV-533
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0904GB
AV-534
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0905GB
AV-535
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0906GB
AV-536
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0907GB
AV-537
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0908GB
AV-538
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0909GB
AV-539
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0910GB
AV-540
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0911GB
AV-541
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0912GB
AV-542
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0913GB
AV-543
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0914GB
AV-544
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0915GB
AV-545
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0916GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-546
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JPNIA0006ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
Ground Ground — switch — 0V H
(B/W)
ON
ignition
2
(Y) I
OFF
Ignition
3
(V/Y) J
ACC
4 — Composite image shield — — — —
Ignition
5 K
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON
Start confirmation/adjust- L
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON M
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
AV
Ignition
7 — RGB image ground — switch — 0V
ON
O
Ignition
8 Horizontal synchronizing P
(W) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E
AV-547
DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
5.0 V
played.
Ignition
9
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch
ON
PKIB4948J
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
13
(B/W)
ON
Ignition When rear view camera im-

15
Ground Composite image signal Input switch age or AUX image is dis-
(B)
ON played.
SKIB2251J
Ignition
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J
Ignition
18 play color bar by
ON
SIS screen.
SKIB2237J
Ignition
19
(G)
ON
SKIB3603E
AV-548
DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
20 Vertical synchronizing (VP) C
(R) signal
ON
SKIB3598E D
21 Ground RGB synchronizing ground — — — —
Ignition
(G) (DISP→CONT) brightness. F
ON
PKIB5039J
G
23 — Shield — — — —
AV
AV-549
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0897GB
AV-550
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0898GB
AV-551
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0899GB
AV-552
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0900GB
AV-553
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0901GB
AV-554
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0902GB
AV-555
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0903GB
AV-556
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0904GB
AV-557
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0905GB
AV-558
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0906GB
AV-559
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0907GB
AV-560
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0908GB
AV-561
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0909GB
AV-562
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0910GB
AV-563
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0911GB
AV-564
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0912GB
AV-565
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0913GB
AV-566
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0914GB
AV-567
DISPLAY UNIT
JCNWM0915GB
AV-568
DISPLAY UNIT
AV
JCNWM0916GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-569
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA1094ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(LG) (V) er LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(P) (L) er RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
5 6
Sound signal woofer RH Output switch Audio output
(Y) (BR)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
7
(B)
ON
Ignition
10
(SB)
OFF
Ignition
11
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
(B)
ON
AV-570
BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
13 8 C
Sound signal woofer LH Output switch Audio output
(R) (BR)
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
(L) (O) RH
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(W) (B) LH
ON
H
SKIB3609E
I
Ignition
20
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — 12.0 V
(V)
ACC
J
Ignition
24 23 Stereo sound signal front K
(B) (W) LH
ON
L
SKIB3609E
M
Ignition
(W/R) (B/R) RH
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Output switch Audio output P
(G) (R) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
AV-571
BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
29 30 Sound signal center speak-
(V) (P) er
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(BR) (Y) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(W/L) (GR/V) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(W/L) (W/R) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(B) (W) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(Y) (BR) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
AV-572
BOSE AMP.
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
56 55 When inputting voice guid- C
Voice guidance signal Input switch
(W/L) (W/R) ance.
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
(W/R) (B/R) ter
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(GR/V) (W/L) ter
ON
H
SKIB3609E
I
— — — — —
(P) (L)
— — — — — J
(P) (L)
— — — — —
(L) (H)
K
— — — — —
(L) (H)
79 — Shield — — — —
L
*: All surround sounds are input only when the 5.1 channel surround sound is played.
AV
AV-573
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0897GB
AV-574
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0898GB
AV-575
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0899GB
AV-576
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0900GB
AV-577
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0901GB
AV-578
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0902GB
AV-579
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0903GB
AV-580
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0904GB
AV-581
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0905GB
AV-582
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0906GB
AV-583
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0907GB
AV-584
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0908GB
AV-585
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0909GB
AV-586
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0910GB
AV-587
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0911GB
AV-588
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0912GB
AV-589
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0913GB
AV-590
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0914GB
AV-591
BOSE AMP.
JCNWM0915GB
AV-592
BOSE AMP.
AV
JCNWM0916GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-593
DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
TERMINAL LAYOUT
PHYSICAL VALUES
JPNIA1095ZZ
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B/W)
ON
Ignition
2
(Y)
OFF
3
OFF
Ignition
4
(V/W)
ACC
5 — Shield — — — —
6 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
(G) signal played.
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
ON
Ignition
10 Composite image (AUX)
(V) signal ground
ON
AV-594
DVD PLAYER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
13 11 C
AUX sound signal LH Input switch AUX sound output.
(B) (G)
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
14 12
AUX sound signal RH Input switch AUX sound output.
(W) (R)
ON
F
SKIB3609E
15 — AUX sound signal shield — — — —

G
Stereo (DVD and AUX Ignition H

21 22
sound) sound signal LH Output switch DVD*1 or AUX sound out-
(B) (G) put.
ON
I
SKIB3609E
J
Stereo (DVD and AUX Ignition
23 24
sound) sound signal RH Output switch DVD*1 or AUX sound out-
(R) (W) put.
ON
K
SKIB3609E
25 — Stereo sound signal shield — — — — L

— — — —
(R) (L) Output
30 AV communication signal Input/ M
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
— — — —
(P) (L) Output AV
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
34 — Shield — — — — O
Ignition
P
36 35 Surround sound signal front *2
Output switch DVD sound output.
(W) (B) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
AV-595
DVD PLAYER
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
(W) (B) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(W) (B) ter
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
42 41 Surround sound signal
(L) (R) woofer
ON
SKIB3609E
43 — Shield — — — —
44 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(W) (B) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
(W) (B) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
• *1: Stereo sounds are input only when the 2 channel stereo sound is played.
• *2: All surround sounds are input only when the 5.1 channel surround sound is played.
AV-596
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0897GB
P
AV-597
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0898GB
AV-598
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0899GB
AV-599
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0900GB
AV-600
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0901GB
AV-601
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0902GB
AV-602
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0903GB
AV-603
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0904GB
AV-604
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0905GB
AV-605
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0906GB
AV-606
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0907GB
AV-607
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0908GB
AV-608
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0909GB
AV-609
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0910GB
AV-610
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0911GB
AV-611
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0912GB
AV-612
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0913GB
AV-613
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0914GB
AV-614
DVD PLAYER
AV
JCNWM0915GB
AV-615
DVD PLAYER
JCNWM0916GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-616
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
JPNIA0007ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) G
+ – Signal name
Output
5 — Shield — — — —
H
Ignition
6 When rear view camera im- I
ON
SKIB2251J
J
Ignition
7
(W)
ON K
8
(R) 0V
ON R position. L
11 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(BR) age is displayed. AV
ON
SKIB2251J
O
Ignition 0V
ON 5.0 V P
— — — —
(L/G) (L) Output
— — — —
(L/R) (H) Output
— — — —
(P) (L) Output
AV-617
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
— — — —
(L) (H) Output

22
(W) 0V
ON R position.

right.
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
23
(G)
ON
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2

right.
SKIB3827E
A: Sensor signal 1
24
(SB)
ON
SKIB3828E
A: Sensor signal 1
B: Sensor signal 2
Ignition
ON
SKIB3829E
A: Sensor signal 3
B: Sensor signal 1
AV-618
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
NOTE: B
(destination unit).
C
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
D
JSNIA0012GB
E
Ignition
30
(V)
ACC
F
Ignition
31
(B/R)
ON
Ignition G
32
(Y)
OFF
H
AV
AV-619
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0897GB
AV-620
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0898GB
AV-621
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0899GB
AV-622
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0900GB
AV-623
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0901GB
AV-624
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0902GB
AV-625
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0903GB
AV-626
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0904GB
AV-627
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0905GB
AV-628
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0906GB
AV-629
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0907GB
AV-630
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0908GB
AV-631
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0909GB
AV-632
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0910GB
AV-633
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0911GB
AV-634
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0912GB
AV-635
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0913GB
AV-636
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0914GB
AV-637
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
JCNWM0915GB
AV-638
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
AV
JCNWM0916GB
NOTE:
SWITCH virtually.
AV-639
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
RELATED TO BASIC OPERATION

• All switches cannot be operated
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-434,
selection screen when the CON- "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
SULT-III is started.
• All switches cannot be operated
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
• “MULTI AV” is not displayed on sys-
tion. Refer to AV-464, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
Multifunction switch and preset tem selection screen when the CON-
Procedure".
switch operation does not work. SULT-III is started.
ed. Installation".
For preset switch, refer to AV-660, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
III self-diagnosis result.
Fuel economy display, vehicle set-
ting operation is abnormal. Ignition signal circuit malfunction.
There is no malfunction in the self-diag-
Refer to AV-464, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-
nosis results.
cedure".
On the setting display select “system
Guide sound is not heard. sound (guide sound volume, etc.),” and Voice guidance signal circuit malfunction.
confirm that guide sound is ON.
RELATED TO HANDS FREE PHONE

• Check that the cellular phone is corresponding type (Bluetooth™ correspond) when the hands free related
malfunction vehicle is in service before performing a diagnosis,.
• There is a case that malfunction occurs due to the version change of the phone type, etc. even though it is a
corresponding type. Therefore, confirm it by changing the cellular phone to another corresponding type
phone, and check that it operates normally. It is necessary to distinguish whether the cause is the vehicle or
cellular phone.
Simple check for Bluetooth™ communication
If cellular phone and NAVI control unit cannot be connected with Bluetooth™ communication, following proce-
dure allows the technician to judge which device has malfunction.
1. Turn on a cellular phone, not connecting Bluetooth™ communication.
2. Start CONSULT-III, then start Windows®.
3. Set CONSULT-III near a cellular phone.
4. When operated Bluetooth™ registration by cellular phone, check
if CONSULT-III* would be displayed on the device name.
(If other Bluetooth™ device is located near cellular phone, a
name of the device would be displayed also.)
NOTE:
*:Displayed device name is “NISSAN- ”.
• If no device name is displayed, cellular phone is malfunction.
Repair the cellular phone first, then perform diagnosis.
• If CONSULT-III is displayed on device name, cellular phone is nor-
mal. Perform diagnosis as per the following table. JPNIA0441GB
AV-640

Does not recognize cellular There is malfunction in the CONSULT-III
Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
phone connection. (no connec- self-diagnosis result.
tion is displayed on the display There is no malfunction in the CONSULT- B
at the guide.) Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
III self-diagnosis results.
• Hands free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot C
be established. NAVI control unit malfunction.
Hands free phone cannot be
• Hands free phone operation can be per- Replace NAVI control unit.
established.
formed, however, voice between each Refer to AV-649, "Removal and Installation".
other cannot be heard during the con- D
versation.
Check the “Handsfree Voice Microphone
NAVI control unit malfunction.
Test”in Confirmation/Adjustment mode if E
Replace NAVI control unit.
sound is heard. Refer to AV-419, "Diagno-
Refer to AV-649, "Removal and Installation".
The other party's voice cannot sis Description".
be heard by hands free phone. Check the “Handsfree Voice Microphone
Test”in Confirmation/Adjustment mode if F
TEL voice signal circuit.
sound is not heard. Refer to AV-419, "Di-
agnosis Description"
NAVI control unit malfunction. G
Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal. Replace NAVI control unit.
by the other party with hands Refer to AV-649, "Removal and Installation".
free phone communication. Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Sound operation function does not work. H

I
to take
Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. J
It cannot be switched to rear view Refer to AV-434, "CONSULT-III Func-
sis result.
monitor even when the selector le- tion (MULTI AV)".
ver is in the reverse position. There is not malfunction in the CONSULT-III self-diag- Reverse signal circuit malfunction.(AV K
cuit malfunction.
L
dure".
Camera image is not shown. DVD and AUX images are normal.
tion. M
dure".
Possible route line is indicated ab- Steering angle sensor signal circuits.
The “Steer. Angle Sensor” is not turned ON at “Con- AV
normally when camera image is dis- Refer to AV-487, "Diagnosis Proce-
nection Confirmation” of “Camera Cont.”
played. dure".
circuit malfunction between AV con- O
dure".
Camera image is rolling. AUX image is rolling P
dure".
AV-641

tion.
Refer to AV-465, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
• Composite images are not dis-
dure".
played.(camera and DVD and AUX im-
• Communication Circuit malfunction between AV control
age)
• voice sound is heard.
RGB image is not shown. • Camera image is normal. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
• DVD and AUX images are not dis- Refer to AV-434, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
played.
• “Multi AV” is not displayed on system tion.
selection screen when the CONSULT- Refer to AV-464, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Proce-
• Composite images are normal. (cam-
era and DVD and AUX image)
NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuit mal-
Composite images are normal.(camera function.
and DVD and AUX image) Refer to AV-464, "NAVI CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-
cedure"
Map image is not shown.
• Camera image is normal.
• DVD and AUX images are not dis- Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
played. Refer to AV-434, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".
• Audio sound is not heard.
proper. (All RGB image)
Screen looks yellowish. trol unit and display unit.
Refer AV-478, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RGB signal (R: red) circuit malfunction between NAVI
Light blue (Cyan) tint. control unit and AV control unit.
RGB signal (G: green) circuit malfunction between NAVI
Purple (Magenta) tint. control unit and AV control unit.
proper. (NAVI image only)
RGB signal (B: blue) circuit malfunction between NAVI
Screen looks yellowish. control unit and AV control unit.
All RGB screen is rolling. control unit and display unit.
RGB screen is rolling.
RGB synchronizing signal circuit malfunction between
Only NAVI screen is rolling. NAVI control unit and AV control unit.
RELATED TO AUDIO
AV-642

• Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis. B
No sound from all speakers. • BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuits malfunc-
tion. Refer to AV-466, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Proce-
dure". C
• No sound from all speakers.
• It dose not change to “DVD” mode. Perform CONSULT-III self-diagnosis.
Sound is not heard only from the specific Refer to AV-434, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)" D
places.
AM/FM radio is not received. Other audio sounds are normal. Antenna amp. ON signal circuit.
E

F
Steering switch signal GND circuit malfunction.
Steering switch malfunction. G
Only specified switch (1) cannot be operated.
Replace steering switch.
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”, Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
“ ”, “ENTER” switches do not work. Refer to AV-489, "Diagnosis Procedure".
H
Steering switch's “ ”, “VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN”, “ ” Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction.
switches do not work. Refer to AV-491, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
RELATED TO DVD

J
• Composite image signal circuit malfunc-
tion between AV control unit and display
unit.
Refer to AV-486, "Diagnosis Procedure" K
• RGB area synchronizing (YS) signal cir-
and display unit.
Refer to AV-473, "Diagnosis Procedure" L
DVD image is not displayed Displayed in black and nothing displayed.
• Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal cir-
and display unit.
M
• Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal circuit
malfunction between AV control unit and
display unit. AV
DVD player power supply and ground cir-
cuits malfunction.
LED lump of DVD player is not turned on. O
Refer to AV-468, "DVD PLAYER : Diagno-
It dose not change to “DVD” mode. sis Procedure".
LED lump of DVD player is not turned on. to AV-434, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI P
AV)"

NOTE:
AV-643

displayed in black and nothing can be dis-
played
AUX image signal circuit malfunction between DVD play-
• DVD image is normal.
er and auxiliary input jacks.
• Menu image is normal.

work.
AV)".
AV-644
A
NOTE: B
For Navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS
C
The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
No image is displayed. The system in the video mode. Push <DISC> to change the mode. D
The display is turned off. Push < > to turn on the display.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has E
This is not a malfunction.
F
RELATED TO AUDIO G
interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning. H
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA) or could be incor- I
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the red book Compact Disc
Standard and may not play. J

Check if the CD was inserted correctly. K
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone
(about 1 hour) before using the player. L
temperature.
Cannot play. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music M
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3”, or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition,
the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in com- AV
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the
O
Check if the CD is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality. Check if the CD is scratched or dirty. P
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, some time may be required before
the music starts playing. the music starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips.
Skipping with high bit rate files. Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.
AV-645
when playing. or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
NOTE:
the signal.
RELATED TO NAVIGATION
As a result of a slight operating error, a normal symptom might be taken as a malfunction. Therefore, at first,
please check for yourself as per the following table.

The map does not scroll even when
The display is not set to the current location map. Set the display to the current location map.
the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle icon is not displayed. The display is not set to the current location map. Set the display to the current location map.
Move the vehicle to an open area without
The GPS icon is not displayed. GPS signal cannot be received. obstacle. If an object is placed on the up-
per area of GPS antenna, remove it.
If the route destination guidance has been
The route guidance was cancelled.
No voice guidance is available. cancelled, reactivate the route guidance.
The volume is set very low. Adjust the volume of your voice guidance.
This is an inherent characteristic of liquid crystal dis-
plays. Although the liquid crystal display is manufac-
Some pixels in the display are dark- tured with a technology of very high accuracy and it Please continue using the NAVI system,
er or brighter than others. has more than 99.99% effective pixels, a chip or a as it is not a malfunction.
permanent lighting of pixels might occur at 0.01% or
less.
When it is cold, due to the characteristics of the liq-
A mottle remains for a while after It will disappear a few minutes later when
uid crystal display backlight, a brightness mottle
turning the ignition switch ON. the backlight is warmed-up.
might occur.
The adjustment of the contrast or the brightness is Adjust the contrast and the brightness of
The screen is not clear.
inadequate. the display.
Drive the vehicle for a while. The current
The vehicle icon might be misaligned from the actual
location is automatically corrected using
position due to the satellite condition, the vehicle
The vehicle icon is not displayed in the map-matching and GPS information.
condition (driving location or driving condition), etc.
the correct location. (The location (It may take a few minutes.) If the GPS in-
Also, when the vehicle is traveling on a road whose
of the vehicle icon is misaligned formation is not used and the current loca-
information is not stored in the map data, a new road
from the actual position.) tion is not corrected automatically, park the
for example, the vehicle icon might be misaligned
vehicle in a safe location, and then correct
from the actual position.
the current vehicle location.
AV-646
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
connectors.
G
J
K
PKIA0306E
AV
O
PKIA0307E
AV-647
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [BOSE AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
AV CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1034ZZ

4. Bracket RH
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV-648
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
A
DISASSEMBLY B
JPNIA1088ZZ
H
1. NAVI control unit 2. Bracket LH 3. Bracket RH

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove NAVI control unit mounting screws. J
2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and remove the NAVI control unit.
INSTALLATION K
AV
AV-649
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1035ZZ
1. Display unit
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
AV-650
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA1036ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-30, "DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation" (driver side) or G
3. Remove front door speaker. H
INSTALLATION
I
AV
AV-651
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
JPNIA1037ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-36, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
AV-652
FRONT SQUAWKER
FRONT SQUAWKER
A
D
JPNIA1038ZZ
E
1. Front squawker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove the speaker grille with squawker. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". G
nector.
3. Remove front squawker. H
INSTALLATION
I
AV
AV-653
REAR SQUAWKER
REAR SQUAWKER
JPNIA1040ZZ
1. Rear squawker
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-43, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear squawker mounting screws.
3. Remove rear squawker.
INSTALLATION
AV-654
CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
D
JPNIA1039ZZ
E
1. Center speaker

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove center speaker grille. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation". G
2. Remove center speaker mounting screws, lift up the center speaker and disconnect center speaker con-
nector.
3. Remove center speaker. H
INSTALLATION
I
AV
AV-655
WOOFER
WOOFER
JPNIA1041ZZ
1. Woofer
REMOVAL
2. Remove woofer mounting bolts, lift up the woofer and disconnect woofer connector.
3. Remove woofer.
INSTALLATION
AV-656
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP.
A
D
JPNIA1042ZZ
E
: Vehicle front
1. BOSE amp.
F
REMOVAL G
1. Remove trunk front finisher upper. Refer to INT-57, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove BOSE amp. mounting bolts, disconnect the BOSE amp. connector.
3. Remove BOSE amp. H
INSTALLATION
I
AV
AV-657
ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
JPNIA1032ZZ

2. Antenna amp.
REMOVAL
3. Remove antenna amp. mounting nut, disconnect the antenna amp. connector.
INSTALLATION
AV-658
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA1052ZZ
F
1. Cluster lid D
G
REMOVAL H
3. Remove multifunction switch. I
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-659
PRESET SWITCH
PRESET SWITCH
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1044ZZ
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
1. Preset switch
A. Screw
B. Screw
JPNIA1045ZZ
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
AV-660
REAR CONTROL SWITCH
REAR CONTROL SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA1046ZZ
F
A. Clip
G
REMOVAL H
3. Remove rear control switch. I
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-661
DVD PLAYER
DVD PLAYER
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1047ZZ
1. DVD player
REMOVAL
1. Remove grove box. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation"
2. Remove DVD player mounting screw, disconnect the DVD player connector.
3. Remove DVD player.
INSTALLATION
AV-662
A
REMOVAL B
DISASSEMBLY
C
JPNIA1048ZZ
F
REMOVAL
1. Remove console finisher. Refer to IP-22, "Removal and Installation". H
I
INSTALLATION
J
AV
AV-663
MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
REMOVAL
Refer to INL-89, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0132ZZ
1. Microphone
REMOVAL
1. Remove map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-89, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove microphone(1), stretching pawls of map lamp assem-
bly.
JSNIA0132ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV-664
GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
A
AV
P
JPNIA1054GB
AV-665
GPS ANTENNA
JPNIA1055ZZ
1. GPS antenna
REMOVAL
2. Remove GPS antenna mounting screws, disconnect GPS antenna connector.
3. Remove GPS antenna.
INSTALLATION
AV-666
TEL ANTENNA
TEL ANTENNA
A
AV
P
JPNIA1054GB
AV-667
TEL ANTENNA
JPNIA1053ZZ
1. TEL antenna
REMOVAL
2. Remove trunk front finisher. Refer toINT-57, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove TEL antenna mounting nit, disconnect the TEL antenna connector.
4. Remove TEL antenna.
INSTALLATION
AV-668
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
A
D
JPNIA1049ZZ
E

F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear wheelhouse finisher RH. Refer to INT-57, "Removal and Installation". G
INSTALLATION H

I
AV
AV-669
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
DISASSEMBLY
JPNIA1050ZZ
1. Rear view camera

2. Seal
REMOVAL
1. Remove trunk lid finisher inner. Refer to INT-59, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove rear view camera.
INSTALLATION
Adjust the guide line position if the guide line position is shifted after installing the rear view camera.
and 0.5 m (1.64 ft), 1.0 m (3.28 ft) from the rear end of the
bumper.
SKIB3691E
AV-670
REAR VIEW CAMERA
that its angle is aligned with the correction line of the rear of the A
vehicle.
Selected pattern :7 B
Pressing “ENTER” enable the camera control unit to memory C
SKIB3689E
Up/Down adjustment range : −20 – 20 D
CAUTION:
Never operate other function such as pressing BACK while writing index data. E
F
tor.
AV
AV-671
REMOVAL
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA0135ZZ
1. Spiral cable
REMOVAL
3. Remove steering angle sensor.
INSTALLATION
AV-672
A
AV
P
JPNIA1054GB
AV-673

Audio, Visual & Navigation System PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Audio, Visual & Navigation System PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ......19 ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ................................. 37

ANTENNA AMP. ................................................ 43 COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 72

DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT .........................94 PRECAUTION ............................................ 169

ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 261 FRONT SQUAWKER ....................................... 382

DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 287 CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 384

System Description INFOID:0000000003765589 H

1. Front squawker RH 2. Front squawker LH 3. Front door speaker LH

Component Description INFOID:0000000003765591

Part name Description

Self-diagnosis mode can perform the following items. B

VERSIONS DISPLAY FUNCTION

4. The diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.

VOLUME up “VOL up” switch

Key check item (steering switch) J

1. Turn ignition switch ON.

4. Returns to diagnosis default screen and displays “AV DIAGNOSIS”.

NO HISTORY BTHF — — Not used.

Display item Description

Power source Fuse No. D

Transmits the steering switch signal to audio unit.

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL A CIRCUIT

Audio unit Spiral cable

Transmits the steering switch signal to audio unit.

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL B CIRCUIT

Audio unit Spiral cable

Transmits the steering switch signal to audio unit.

1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH SIGNAL GND CIRCUIT

Audio unit Spiral cable

Keep pressing SOURCE

Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Symptoms Inspection location / Probable malfunction location

Occurrence condition Possible cause

1. Audio unit 2. Bracket LH 3. A/C auto amp.

1. Audio display unit 2. Front cover 3. A/C display

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003765614

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003765616

1. Rear door speaker

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003765618

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003765620

Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View".

• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-68, "CONSULT-III Function (MULTI AV)".

WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR

1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF PREDICTED COURSE LINE E

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-

1.CORRECTION OF CENTER POSITION OF PREDICTED COURSE LINE

Multi AV system means that the following systems are integrated.

System name System explanation

1. Front squawker RH 2. Front squawker LH 3. Front door speaker LH

Part name Description

1. Front squawker RH 2. Front squawker LH 3. Front door speaker LH

Part name Description

System Description INFOID:0000000003882708

CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE

Correction Of Steering Neutral Position

1. Front squawker RH 2. Front squawker LH 3. Front door speaker LH

Part name Description

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode

4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the M